JP7196116B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result. For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine that controls a state in which a jackpot game can be executed based on the stop display of seven symbols in a row on a decorative symbol display device.

JP 2014-147575 A

According to the gaming machine described above, during execution of the big win start effect, it is configured to issue a right hitting instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the right by operating the ball shooting handle. There is still room for improvement with respect to such an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing an instruction prompting a player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction. be.

(A) It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result, and the normal state and the above advantageous state compared to the normal state. A game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state)) that is easily controlled in a state,
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30) capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to an operation by a player;
A first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to prompt the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example, , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). For example, updating means that can be updated to "1" or "2") (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIGS. 12-13),
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 ( c1) image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen),
The guidance display means
Performing the first guidance display in the first display area,
performing the second guidance display in a second display area different from the first display area and smaller than the first display area;
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the second display is performed during a first period of a predetermined period during which a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state is executed. Display guidance,
During the predetermined period and in the second period after the first period , the first guide display and the second guide display (for example, in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26) image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown),
During the period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (d1) and (d2), While ending the image display corresponding to , the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
In the special state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the big hit as shown in FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49 The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect in the variable state),
The guiding means are
In the first period, the light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the guide light emission,
extinguishing the light emitting means before the second period starts;
When the second period starts, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that lights up the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the corresponding image display),
It is characterized by
(1) A special state that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result, and that it is easier to control to the advantageous state than the normal state and the normal state. (For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a time-saving state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state)),
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
Continuing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed,
moreover,
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 12-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). For example, update means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIGS. 12-13) that can be updated to "1" or "2");
Adjusting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13 and FIG. 2, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, thereby prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game;
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. Part that can decide whether to execute the advance notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an adjustment is made to reduce the speed at which the game value is awarded. It is possible to prevent the gambling nature from being excessively increased due to the fact that the predetermined numerical data is the second value or not, so that the performance control can be executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the invention according to the following means 2. Conventionally, in a game machine, as shown in JP 2016-83580 A, a predetermined number of times variable to a high probability state (variable probability state) which is a special state that is easily controlled to a jackpot state that is more advantageous than the normal state There is a gaming machine that is controlled over the number of display times.

However, by the time the high probability state (variable probability state) ends, the advantageous state (jackpot state) that is controlled to the high probability state (variable probability state) again occurs repeatedly. There is a problem that it may be granted in between, and there is a fear that the player's gambling spirit will be excessively agitated.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made by paying attention to such problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of preventing excessive increase in gambling nature due to excessive game value given in a short period of time. aim.

The game machine of means 1 is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state and the normal state. A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state)),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 12-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). For example, update means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIGS. 12-13) that can be updated to "1" or "2");
Adjusting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13 and FIG. 2, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, thereby prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game;
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. Part that can decide whether to execute the advance notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment is executed to reduce the speed at which the game value is given. It is possible to prevent gambling property from excessively increasing due to the impartation of game value, and to improve the amusement of the game because performance control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be executed. .

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the characterizing part of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. It is an explanatory diagram showing a special figure LED board and a fourth symbol unit. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a hit type table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is explanatory drawing which shows a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design variation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening post-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation processing during a big hit. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during hit variation. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a big hit. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lighting mode of a lamp|ramp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from power failure during the fanfare production|presentation by special figure 1 hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure during 1 round of big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 1 big hit at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure during two rounds of big hits at the time of one special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 2 rounds of big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 3 big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of returning from power failure during the 4 big hit rounds at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of returning from power failure between the rounds after 4 big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of resetting from power failure during the jackpot final round at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of resetting from power failure during the ending production at the time of special figure 1 hit. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is the schematic of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not a pre-reading advance notice effect is executed and the determination ratio of the display pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of updating a first reserved memory display area and a second reserved memory display area; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display control timer and a movable body control timer; It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 loss and super reach α2 loss. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 jackpot and the super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the presence or absence of a movable body suggesting motion and an image magnification ratio in each enlargement display period; (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode of each movable body action suggesting effect, and (B) is a view showing an effect mode of each movable body action effect. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation form to the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine of the characteristic portion 162SG. (A), (B), and (C) are diagrams illustrating effect control commands. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the variable display time of each variation pattern, and a ball output state flag. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main process in the pachinko game machine of characteristic part 162SG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control in the pachinko game machine of characteristic part 162SG. (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the ball-out state determination process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball-out state flag value and each adjustment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the state of progress of the big win and the state of opening and closing the big prize opening. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball output state flag value and each period in the jackpot state. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of the big win (excluding the probability variable jackpot C), and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of the loss. is. (A) is a diagram showing a first reserved memory display area and a second reserved memory display area, and (B) is a diagram showing an update example of the first reserved memory display area and the second reserved memory display area. . 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing advance notice effect type determination tables A to C; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning variation pattern determination table to be selected according to the value of the put-out state flag;

<Basic description>
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

[Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.]
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

In addition, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also called "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is "second special symbol". It is also called 2 special pattern” or “second special pattern”. Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first start winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects are provided at left and right upper positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be constructed using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls that enter the large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls won in the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state at the time of some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning mouth is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning mouth is also the same etc.) to open the big prize mouth. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period in which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time-saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the termination conditions, such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big win game state, is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut short time, number of times cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variable state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case where the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability-high base state, a high-probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and a normal state is also called a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which is more reliable than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big win'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stop-displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 is a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined small winning combination (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect that foretells the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state of the same mode as the small winning game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Board configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (for example, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 , an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display 20, first reserve It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) are executed by effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 etc., and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and settings for making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; N), after executing the initialization process (step S6), the setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch 92 is ON, the initialization process of step S6 The setting change process of step S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. . If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is OFF when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is OFF, and if the clear switch 92 is ON, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining variation patterns based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It specifies the content of the production (such as the type of reach production), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big win, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the probability of winning a big win. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, it is determined so that the probability that the special figure display result will be "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state will be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the fluctuation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination value is regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6) may be provided. A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, CTC register settings. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; N), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Y), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 for the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative patterns is read out from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of fixed decorative patterns is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit middle production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern corresponding to the production content in the small-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit mid-effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end effect. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small-hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small-hit game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small-hit game state based on the setting contents. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big win game state, and executes various effect control in the big win game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

[Modified example of basic explanation]
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

In addition, the game can be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using the hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, it includes a ratio of "0%" for one and a ratio of "100%" or less than "100%" for the other.

<Description on Characteristic Portion 075F>
Next, the game machine according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-60.

[Configuration of pachinko game machine 1 related to characteristic part 075F]
It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 075F of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 10-4). (usually called a large winning opening) is formed.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is installed in the space between the game board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A large prize winning opening door is provided, and the large winning opening door slides horizontally between the inner side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close the path to the normal large winning opening for the game balls. be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game balls enter the normal large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the normal large winning opening. .

A game ball entering the normal big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through a region provided inside the normal big winning hole. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23, the game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. Also, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round ends and the normal big winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V-variable winning ball device 075F007B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see FIG. 10-4). V big prize opening) is formed.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning entrance door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning entrance door is located between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By horizontally sliding and opening the space between , the path for the game ball to the V big winning opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V large winning opening. .

A game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024 (see FIG. 10-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V big prize opening. . By detecting the game ball by the V winning switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. That is, in the present embodiment, V winning occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V big winning opening during the round of the jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. . In addition, the normal big prize mouth and the V big prize mouth are also collectively referred to as the big prize mouth. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

A pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps on a game board 2.例文帳に追加Specifically, in the pachinko game machine 1, in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacker lamp 9c provided in the vicinity of the normal big winning opening and the V big winning opening, an attacker upper lamp 075F009U, a left lower lamp 075F009D provided on the lower left of the game board 2, a board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and A board left lamp 075F009E is provided.

The movable body lamp 9d lights or flashes a lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is in a stopped state or an operating state, so that characters attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example "XXX") is emitted. The attacker lamp 9c emits light in the vicinity of the attacker by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U emits light near the upper part of the attacker by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D emits light near the lower left corner of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a character-like housing, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the character-like housing on the right side of the image display device 5 emits light. . The panel left lamp 075F009E emits light near the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. Note that the board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a character-like housing, like the board right lamp 075F009F. Also, the board right lamp 075F009F and the board left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.) like the movable body lamp 9d.

A pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps in a game machine frame 3. - 特許庁Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a frame lamp made up of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3. Prepare.

Here, FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of 11 lamps, 1st to 11th lamps, extending counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3 . The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), thereby causing the vicinity of the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has a group of 11 lamps, 1st to 11th lamps, clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3 . The frame right lamp 075F009R lights or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), thereby causing the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special figure LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the game board 2. - 特許庁The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and shown in FIG. It is a substrate that plays the role of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the variation of the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED.

Here, FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special figure LED board 075F020 and the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 10-3(a), the special figure LED board 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 that indicates the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable that indicates the variable display of the second special figure. Display unit 075F022, special figure 1 storage display unit 075F023 showing the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, special figure 2 memory display part showing the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special figure game 075F024, a normal pattern storage display unit 075F025 showing the number of normal pattern pending storage, a normal pattern display unit 075F026 showing variable display of normal patterns, a right hitting display unit 075F030 prompting the player to hit right, and a variable state , a time saving display portion 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display portion 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, the result, the current game state, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking by lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 075F020 can urge the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/extinguishment of lighting means such as an LED in the right hitting display section 075F030. In the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-hand hitting display section 075F030 lights (lights up), and when not prompting the player to hit to the right, That is, when prompting the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hitting display section 075F030 is extinguished. After the design is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 075F030, and after the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display part 075F030 is extinguished. Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may light the right-hand hitting display section 075F030 only during the big win round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 and turns off the right hitting display section 075F030.

Here, hitting to the right means that the game ball is shot toward the second flow path out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. is to operate the hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path passing through the left area of the game area, and ahead of it is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This path does not have the second start winning opening formed in 6B. The second flow path is, for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area, and beyond that is a second start winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V grand prize opening) exist. When the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows through the first flow-down path toward the first start winning opening. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow-down path, the game ball passes through the second flow-down path and enters the second start winning opening or the big winning opening (normal big winning opening, V big winning opening). flow into. In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game after the occurrence of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state and variable probability state), the player hits to the right, and is provided on the right side of the game area. The game ball is allowed to enter the second start winning opening and the big winning opening, and during this time, the right-handed display section 075F030 prompts the player to hit right. The player hits to the right while the display urging him to hit to the right is being displayed, causing the game balls to enter the second start winning opening and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls to be paid out. The right of the second special game can be obtained, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls into the normal big winning opening. Furthermore, as will be described later in detail, the V big winning opening is opened during the round of the probability variable jackpot. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and be controlled to the variable probability state. Therefore, by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is being displayed, the player can benefit overall. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to shoot the game ball toward the first flow-down path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 corresponds to the special figure 1 memory display unit 075F051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game and the second special figure game. Special figure 2 storage display unit 075F052 showing the second reserved storage number, Special figure 1 variable display part 075F053 indicating the status or display result of the variable display of the first special figure, The situation of the variable display of the second special figure or It has a special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 showing the display result and a right hitting display portion 075F055 prompting the player to hit right. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence/absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of reservations, and the instruction to hit to the right by lighting/flashing/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means. Below, it is also called the variable display of the 1st special design to represent the variation of the stop design of the 1st special design by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display section 075F021. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 is also referred to as the variation display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) to indicate that the player should hit to the right. is not urged to the player, that is, when the player is urged to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 is extinguished. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 120 for effect control lights the right-handed display part 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103 . Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may light up the right-hand hitting display section 075F055 only during the big win round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 extinguishes the right-handed display portion 075F055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103 .

FIG. 10-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the right board lamp 075F009F, the left board lamp 075F009E, the right frame lamp 075F009R, and the left frame lamp 075F009L , is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (blinking) under the control of the effect control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. The movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the right board lamp 075F009F, the left board lamp 075F009E, the right frame lamp 075F009R, and the left frame lamp 075F009L, or all of them are played together. Also called effect lamp 9 .

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and is capable of lighting (blinking) each display portion under the control of the control CPU 120. FIG.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display unit can be lit (flashed) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
10-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 displays a first reserved memory display area 075F005D in which the number of reserved memories can be displayed by the number of circular reserved indications, and the number of second reserved memories is displayed by the number of reserved indications of the circle. A second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second reserved storage display area 075F005U.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first reserved memory number, and a display of the second reserved memory number. doing.

At the center of the first display area 075F005F, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged, and the variable display of the decorative patterns can be executed. It's becoming Also, a small pattern 075F005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 075F005M is also a pattern that is always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, a decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is located at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. In the part, it is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 075F005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided in the lower center of the first display area 075F005F.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-8.

(jackpot type)
FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in FIG. 10-6, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the big win, there is a big win probability after the end of the big win game state, a base after the end of the big win game state, and a fluctuation time after the end of the big win game state. , and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot.

Specifically, as types of jackpots, 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot are provided. In addition, below, the mark of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth. In the 5R normal jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes V difficult to win (for example, the time to open the lid that opens and closes the V big winning opening is shorter than a predetermined time, or the lid The game ball is not allowed to enter a specific area by repeating the opening and closing of the box, etc.), and after five rounds of the jackpot game state are completed, the jackpot is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state. In the normal jackpot, either the condition that such a low probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is established. continue until

The 5R probability variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V ), which is controlled to a high-probability state and a high-base state after five rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpot, either the condition that such a high probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is established. continue until

The 10R probability variable jackpot is a control pattern in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is easy to win V ), which is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after 10 rounds of the jackpot game state is completed. In the probability variable jackpot, either the condition that such a high probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is established. continue until

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot have common decorative symbols that stop when the jackpot occurs. In addition, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable variable jackpot have common fanfare effects (for example, backgrounds, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) that are performed when the jackpot occurs. The performance mode of the round performance (for example, the background, the characters appearing, the sound effect, etc.) is common to each other, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize which of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred, as far as the stopped decorative symbols, fanfare effects, and round effects are seen. Here, in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (4R in this embodiment). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V big winning hole by striking to the right with the aim of the V big winning hole, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state.

In this way, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the variable probability jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round, so these jackpots are also called chance bonuses.

As for the 10R probability variable jackpot, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 9th round) in the same manner as the 5R probability variable jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V big winning hole by striking to the right with the aim of the V big winning hole, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. However, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs, the fanfare production mode (for example, the background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) and the round production that is performed during the round of the jackpot game state is different from the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, when the 10R variable probability big win occurs, the player can recognize that the variable probability big win has occurred. Such a 10R probability variable jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in Figure 10-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for judging whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, updated from 0 to the upper limit of 65535, and then updated from 0 again. Random 1 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type to be one of the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for variation pattern type determination) that determines the type (type) of the variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for variation pattern determination) that determines a variation pattern (variation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for normal design hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design. Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of random 4 (for random 4 initial value determination).

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, which of a plurality of types of jackpots such as a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, and a 10R probability variable jackpot as a jackpot gaming state is selected based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). It is determined. At this time, the jackpot pattern may also be determined based on the random 1 value.

Also, first, the variation pattern type is determined using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 4) is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a big hit, the variation patterns are classified into a normal reach variation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach variation pattern type with super reach. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. Also, if it is a loss, it is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type that does not involve reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

In such a variation pattern type, when the display result is lost, the selection rate of the variation pattern type is different between when it is in the time saving state and when it is not in the time saving state (in the time saving state, compared to when it is not in the time saving state Therefore, the percentage of selecting a variation pattern type with a short variation display time such as the normal variation pattern type is set high). Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed is a predetermined number or more and when it is less than a predetermined number. When the reserved memory number of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, execution of reserved number reduction control for shortening the variable display time compared to when the reserved memory number of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. You may make it For example, in the hold number reduction control state, compared to when it is not in the hold number reduction control state, it is set so that the rate of selecting a fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time such as a normal fluctuation pattern type is higher , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened compared to when the number of holds reduction control state is not in effect. Further, in the hold number reduction control, even if the same change pattern type is selected, the change display time itself of the change pattern type may be shortened compared to when the hold number reduction control state is not performed.

Also, the variation pattern may be a one-stage determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery instead of the two-stage determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 10-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which jackpot determination values to be compared with the random R are set. The big hit determination table includes a normal (non-variable probability) big win determination table used in a normal state (game state not variable probability state, that is, non-variable probability state) and a variable probability big win determination table used in the variable probability state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value listed in the left column of FIG. 10-8 (A) is set as the jackpot determination value, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, the right of FIG. Each numerical value described in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the probability variable jackpot judgment table is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (called the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). By adding the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number of jackpot determination values (referred to as the probability variable jackpot determination value or the second jackpot determination value) than the probability variable jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined that the game is a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). ), it is decided to make a big hit (a normal big win or a variable probability big win) with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10-8(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

FIGS. 10-8 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table. FIG. 10-8(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 10-8(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8 (B), the numerical value to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and , and "10R probability variable jackpot" are set with corresponding jackpot determination values. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8(C), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot", which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 (B) and (C), the big hit type determination value is also used as a judgment value (big hit design determination value) for determining the big hit design of the first special design and the second special design. be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to the "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "1". The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variable big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variable big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "7". The special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022 on the special figure LED board 075F020 are such that the lighting means such as LED lights or blinks in a lighting mode corresponding to each big hit pattern, so that the stopped jackpot pattern can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as LED in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. A jackpot pattern can be shown.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, the ratio of selecting "10R probability variable jackpot" is higher than the jackpot types selectable with the first special symbol for the jackpot with the second special symbol, and the player The ratio of selecting the jackpot type that is advantageous for the player is high.

(Production control command)
FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various production control commands to the production control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, the 1st byte indicates MODE (class of command), and the 2nd byte indicates EXT (type of command). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-9 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In the following, "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special figure. When the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H) is received, the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decoration pattern.

The command 81XX(H) is a variation pattern command designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbols (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01(H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that it is determined to be a failure. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R normal jackpot is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R probability variable jackpot is determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that the 10R probability variable jackpot is determined. Each of the losing designation command, the 5R normal jackpot designation command, the 5R probability variable jackpot designation command, and the 10R probability variable jackpot designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8C system commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the first special figure. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the second special figure. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates display of the initial screen at power-on) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery specification command that specifies recovery from power failure (specifies display of a power failure recovery screen) that is transmitted when power supply to the game machine is resumed. A command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating a normal state background. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability changing state designation command that designates the background of the probability changing state. Each of the normal state designation command, the time saving state designation command, and the variable probability state designation command, or these are collectively referred to as the 95 series command or the background designation command. A command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of the 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, and a jackpot start 3 designation command, or these commands are also collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designation command during the opening of the big winning opening is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX(H) is a post-opening designation command for the large winning opening that indicates closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after the opening of the big winning opening is also called an A2 system command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of the 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designation command, the jackpot end 2 designation command, and the jackpot end 3 designation command, or collectively these commands are also called A3 series commands.

Command AD00 (H) is a variable probability determination device passing designation command that designates that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device passage specification command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designating command that designates that the first reserved storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved storage number designation command is also called a C1-type command. The command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that designates that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserve storage number designation command is also called a C2-type command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are the contents of the judgment result at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur and the judgment result of the type of the big win among the results of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results is.

C7XX(H) is a large winning opening designation command indicating passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display extinguishing command indicating extinguishing of the right-handed display. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, especially the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD system command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not there will be a big hit at the time of start-up winning, and determines the range of determination values of the type of the big win and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. Then, a value designating a big hit and a value designating the type of the big win are set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, and control is performed to transmit them to the effect control CPU 120 . In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type to the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can recognize the type of the big win, and can recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F will be described. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-10 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 is provided with a first pending storage buffer (storage buffer for storing pending storage information of the first special symbol) or a second pending storage buffer (second special It is determined whether or not there is reserved storage data in a storage buffer for storing reserved storage information of symbols (step 075FS001). If there is no reserved storage data in either the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (N at step 075FS001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step 075FS002). When the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal process is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y at step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, after transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt, based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is set, the customer It is controlled so as not to send the wait demo designation command. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is reset when the variable display of the next special symbol is started.

When there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not it is data (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer (the Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for a second special symbol (step 075FS005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006 ).

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special The variable display of the pattern is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

According to the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is displayed in the second 1 It is executed with priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the reserved storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the saving area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the reserve storage buffer of RAM 102 . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in a pending storage buffer in RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103, based on the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction, performs control to transmit the reserved storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 ( step 075FS009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the reserve storage buffer, and executes a judging module for a big hit (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging a big hit, which is extracted in the starting winning judging process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and judges the big win. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value (see FIG. 10-8) with a big-hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit.

In the process of judging a big hit, when the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than when the game state is a non-variable probability state (normal game state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the probability variable jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (table in which the numbers on the right side of FIG. 10-8 (A) are set) and the number of jackpot determination values A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 10-8(A) are set) is provided which is set to be smaller than the time jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the variable probability state, and when the gaming state is the variable probability state, performs the processing for judging the big hit using the variable probability big hit determination table, and the game state is normal. When it is in the state or the time-saving state, the judgment of the big hit is processed using the normal big-hit judgment table. That is, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big-hit determination values shown in FIG. 10-8(A). If it is determined to be a big hit (Y at step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. Determining whether or not to make a big win means determining whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbols in the special symbols are to be the big winning symbols. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state is performed by whether or not the variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the game state is shifted to the variable probability state, and is reset when ending the variable probability state. Specifically, the probability variable flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the condition that the next big hit is determined. It is reset at the timing of ending the variable display of the special symbols and stop-displaying the stop symbols when the earlier condition is satisfied.

If the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big-hit determination values (N at step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

In step 075FS011, if the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) coincides with any of the big-hit determination values, the CPU 103 sets a big-hit flag indicating a big hit (step 075FS012). It should be noted that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used for determining any one of a plurality of types of jackpot types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10-8 (B) and the second table in FIG. 10-8 (C) One of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables is selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 10-8(C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging the type of jackpot extracted in the starting winning judgment process and pre-stored in the first holding memory buffer or the second holding memory buffer, and uses the jackpot type judgment table selected in step 075FS013 to hold the random number. A jackpot type and a jackpot pattern corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for judging the jackpot type stored in the storage buffer is determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 (B) and (C), for the first special symbols and the second special symbols, the relationship between the jackpot types and the jackpot patterns is set so that the jackpot patterns are different for each jackpot type. Since the big win type and the big win pattern are determined at the same time, the correspondence relationship between the big win pattern and the game control according to the big win class is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variable jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol stop symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot pattern determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop pattern of the special patterns according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``3'' is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variable jackpot", "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result specifying command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
10-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a big hit variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the big hit type, and when the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects a losing variation pattern Select the type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads random 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) from the first reservation storage buffer or the second reservation storage buffer, and refers to the selected table to select the variation pattern type from among a plurality of types. to decide.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a variable time timer formed in the RAM 102 to a value corresponding to the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 10-12 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y at step 075FS202), changes the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N at step 075FS202), the process is terminated.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-13 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 10-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to terminate the variable display of the special symbol, and stops at the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 or the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022. Control for deriving and displaying the pattern is performed (step 075FS301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display section 075F022 is ended. In addition, a pattern confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 . Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). Then, when the jackpot flag is not set (N at step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y at step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the variable probability flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, by referring to the opening pattern data stored in the RO 101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), Data indicating the release mode such as interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning openings in all of the 1st to 5th rounds is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102 . In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加Further, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加Data on the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Also, a value corresponding to the fanfare time, which is the time for displaying the big win (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5), is set in the big winning hole control timer (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the big win opening pre-processing, the big winning hole control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the big winning hole is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the processing is terminated.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set in step 075FS303 (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N at step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving frequency counter indicating the remaining fluctuation frequency of the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time saving frequency counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the losing display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the game state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. At step 075FS311, when the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N at step 075FS311), the process proceeds to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step 075FS313). If the variable probability flag is set (Y at step 075FS313), the variable probability flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS315) in response to the game state shifting from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315), and proceeds to step 075FS316. move on. If the variable probability flag is not set at step 075FS313 (N at step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the processing of step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process is terminated.

(Jackpot opening preprocessing)
FIG. 10-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 10-14, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS402), the process is terminated.

When the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y at step 075FS402), a special winning hole open designating command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, according to the opening pattern, the solenoid 82 is driven to open the normal big winning opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the normal big winning opening is opened in the first round.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step 075FS306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning hole control timer to the maximum time (large winning hole opening time) during which the big winning hole can be opened. The corresponding big winning opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process is terminated.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-15 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer has reached 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y at step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS502), it is determined whether or not the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (step 075FS503). Whether or not the normal big winning slot or the V big winning slot is open may be determined by the value of the opening number counter.

If it is determined at step 075FS503 that the normal big winning opening or the V big winning opening is not open (N at step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal big prize slot or the V big prize slot is open (Y at step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N at step 075FS504), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is ON (Y at step 075FS504), the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (updated by addition) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variable probability determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined to be controlled to the variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the variable probability determination flag is set (Y at step 075FS506), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the variable probability determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS506), it is determined whether or not the V prize switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N at step 075FS507), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y at step 075FS507), set the probability variation determination flag (step 075FS508), transmit the probability variation determination device passage specification command (step 075FS509), and move to the processing of step 075FS510 do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach the predetermined number (N at step 075FS510), the process is terminated.

When the value of the winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or to drive the solenoid 075F083 to close the V big winning opening. is closed (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 clears (sets to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the processing.

(Jackpot opening post-processing)
FIG. 10-16 is a flow chart showing an example of processing after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 10-16, in the process after opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (that the jackpot game has ended) is set to the big win opening control timer. For example, the time to notify in the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process exit.

At step 075FS601, if the value of the counter for the number of openings is not 0 (N at step 075FS601), a designated command after opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the round starts in the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round (also referred to as the V open round) in which the V big winning opening is opened, that is, the next round is the V open round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N at step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 and open the normal big winning opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y at step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 and open the V big winning opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot ending process. As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end control timer set with the jackpot end time (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process is terminated. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the big hit flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a variable probability determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the variable probability determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. At step 075FS704, if the variable probability determination flag is set (Y at step 075FS704), the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the probability variation determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set (step 075FS710), and 150 is set to the time saving frequency counter (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS705), and 100 is set to the time saving number counter (step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether it is in any game state, variable probability, short time, or normal, by a variable probability state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103 .

(Production processing during jackpot)
Next, processing by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 10-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect processing during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 10-18, during the big hit effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, a flag such as a jackpot end designation command reception flag is set by the effect control CPU 120 when data indicating that the jackpot end designation command is received is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and the jackpot is won. It is erased at a predetermined timing such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N at step 075FS651), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y at step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). In addition, according to the content of the process data set next, the control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed (step 075FS657). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the content of the process data and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display an image corresponding to the effect during the round on the image display device 5 . . In addition, it outputs a control signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/blinking/extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 . Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the production device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is continued according to the contents of the set process data. (step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the process data described above based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main substrate 11 . For example, when the production control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big win, the production control CPU 120 executes a fanfare production by controlling the production device. Set data. Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big hit, the right-handed display part 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 is displayed to prompt the player to hit to the right. A lighting means such as an LED is turned on.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A1 system command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of the big win, the effect during the round is executed by controlling the effect device as follows. To do so, set the process data corresponding to the production during the round.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a special winning opening open specifying command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 2R of the 5R normal jackpot, it executes the V probability variable suggesting effect suggesting whether or not the probability variable jackpot. set the process data of At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A102 (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V probability variation suggesting performance) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a command (A102 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 2R of the 5R variable probability jackpot, process data for executing the V variable probability suggestive effect (see FIG. 10-41). set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot open designation command (A102 (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V probability variation suggesting performance) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designation command (A103 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 3R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the V notice for notifying that the next 4R is the V open round. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 10-42). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A103 A big win round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V notice performance) corresponding to the specified big win round is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the game ball enters the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 10-43) to aim at the V that makes you aim. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot after opening the jackpot (A203 A command) is used to specify the finished big win round (in this case, 3R), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the end of the specified big win round is set. Aim for the V effect is a guide display using an image display regarding the V big prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the "Aim for V" effect, an image is displayed to urge the player to hit to the right so as to shoot the game ball aiming at the V big winning opening, which is a specific area. In the "Aim for V" effect, an image pointing to the specific area of the V big prize opening itself may be displayed, or an image pointing to the vicinity of the V big prize opening of the specific area may be displayed. , an image may be displayed that indicates the route to the V grand prize opening, which is the specific area.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when receiving a special winning opening open specification command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, continues to aim for V and executes the effect (see FIG. 10-44). Set the process data for At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A104 command) to specify a big win round (in this case, 4R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the specified big win round.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a special winning mouth open designation command (A108 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8R of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the V notice effect for notifying that the next 9R is the V opening round is performed. Set process data for execution. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A108 (8R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (V notice performance in this case) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designated command (A208 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the game ball enters the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect to aim at the V that makes you aim. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the designation command after opening the jackpot (A208 A command) is used to specify the finished big win round (in this case, 8R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the end of the specified big win round.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance aiming at the V continuously when receiving a special winning opening open designation command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 9R of the 10R probability variable jackpot. . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and specifies the jackpot open designation command (A109 command) to specify a big win round (in this case, 9R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the specified big win round.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the big hit round, the V winning effect is executed by the control of the effect device as follows. Set the process data corresponding to the production.

Effect control CPU 120, when receiving a variable probability determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from CPU 103 during 4R of 5R variable probability big hit, sets process data for executing V winning effect (see FIG. 10-44) .

The production control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning production when receiving the variable probability determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during the 9R of the 10R variable probability big hit.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the ending production (FIGS. 10-46, 10) indicating the end of the jackpot game state -47)) to set the process data.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103, thereby controlling the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, thereby performing various effects. perform the production of

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 075F configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 075F has the content of the game performed in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 that has already been explained, the following description will be given in particular to the portion of the game related to the characteristic portion 075F. do.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first shoots a game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left area of the game areas by hitting left. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special game include the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion performance is executed to urge the player to hit to the right. As a right-handed promotion effect, a character (for example, "Right-handed") and a graphic (for example, an arrow pointing rightward, which is the direction of the second flow path) are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying the image, in the right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050, for example, lighting means such as LEDs are lit to prompt right-handed hitting. As a result, the player will hit to the right from then on.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable variable jackpot, and 10 times in the case of the 10R variable jackpot). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

In the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win V, there is no possibility of winning V. Also, since V is not won, the effect of aiming for V is not executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpots are opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V probability variation suggesting performance is executed to suggest whether or not the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting effect, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is not the normal big hit. After that, the V big prize opening is opened in the 4th round, but no V prize is generated, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 5th round after that, and the ending performance is executed when the 5th round is completed.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of the 5R variable probability jackpot, as in the 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is opened in the 1R and 2R, and in the 2R, the V probability variable that suggests whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot. Suggestion production is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting effect, it is informed that the probability variation big hit is achieved. Then, in the 3rd round after that, the V notice effect for notifying that the next 4th round is the V release round is executed. In the 4th R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is given the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 5th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th R. Specifically, in the case of the 10R variable probability big hit, the normal big winning opening is opened in the 1st to 7th Rs, and the V probability variable suggesting effect is executed to suggest whether or not the probability variable big hit is in the 7th R. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting effect, it is informed that the probability variation big hit is achieved. Then, in the 8th round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is the V release round is executed. In the ninth R, when the V big winning hole is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning hole is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, V winning occurs. As a result, the player is given the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, and 150 times in the case of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 10R probability variable jackpot). be done. Furthermore, in the case of the 5R variable probability jackpot and the 10R probability variable jackpot, and when a V prize occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is changed to the variable probability state over a predetermined number of times (150 times) that is controlled in the time-saving state. controlled by That is, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the game state after the big win round is the low-probability high base state, and in the case of the 5R probability variable big win or the 10R probability variable big win, the game state after the big win round is the high-probability high base state.

Even in the variable probability state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055. Therefore, after the first big win (also called first win) occurs, the player is always urged to hit to the right by the right-handed promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the end of the big-hit round.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the special figure) than the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the general figure) control is executed to shorten the time from the normal state, and control is executed to improve the probability of becoming a "normal hit" in the normal game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time-saving state, by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting winning opening is increased, and the second starting is performed. Electronic chew support control may be performed to facilitate entry into the winning slot (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the big hit round, the second special game is started by entering the launched game ball into the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win (also called consecutive chance win) occurs.

As described above, there is a 10R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot in the second special game. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. It should be noted that the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During the round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

Since it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th round. Concretely, as in the case of the first hit, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the 8th round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is the V open round is executed. In the ninth R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state and a probability variable state (high probability and high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) as in the case of the first hit. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot rounds in consecutive wins, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player can hit the consecutive chances in the variable probability state or the short time state after the end of the big hit round, Even in the state, it is always urged to hit to the right by the right hitting promotion effect.

After the first big hit round ends, the probability variable state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring Then, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055 is ended. As a result, the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left area of the game areas by hitting left again.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
10-19 to 10-21, the timing of the main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F will be described. FIGS. 10-19 are timing charts showing an example of the process during the winning variation. FIG. 10-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a big win. FIG. 10-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. 10-19 to 10-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-19, at t1, when the first special game is started by the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 sends the effect control CPU 120 a reserved storage number designation command (C1 system command), background designation command (95 system command), pattern variation designation command (8D system command), display result designation command (8C system command), and variation pattern designation command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the first special symbol (for example, ready-to-win effect, notice effect, etc.) ) and set the process data for executing

For example, the effect control CPU120, by specifying the first reserved memory number based on the reserved memory number designation command, or to update the display of the first reserved memory display area 075F005D, the lighting mode of the special figure 1 memory display unit 075F051 to update. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the game state under control based on the background designation command, and controls the image display device 5 so as to display a background image or the like corresponding to the game state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the start of the variation of the special symbol based on the symbol variation specifying command, and sets the start timing of the effect. Also, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the presence or absence of the big win and the type of the big win based on the display result designation command, and determines the decoration pattern accordingly. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern designation command, the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern (such as presence or absence of reach), and the content of the effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach type of production, etc.).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, when a big hit occurs, at t3 after that, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right hand display lighting command (FD system command) to the effect control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare effect, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image congratulating a big win as fanfare effects, or outputs a sound congratulating a big win from the speakers 8L and 8R. Set the process data for In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image prompting right hitting, or outputs a sound prompting right hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right hitting promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-20, after that, when the big winning round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning opening and also sends a special winning opening open specification command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the production during the round in the 1Rth round.

After that, when the 1R-th game ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A201 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 2R-th game starts at t6, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A102 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 2Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V probability variation suggesting effect (see FIG. 10-41) based on the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening (A102 command).

After that, when the 2R-th game ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A202 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 3Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V advance notice effect (see FIG. 10-42) based on the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A103 command).

After that, when the 3R-th game ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing inter-round effects between rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V effect (see FIG. 10-43) based on the designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and also sends a special winning opening open specification command (A104 command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 4Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V advance notice effect (see FIG. 10-42) based on the special prize opening open designation command (A104 command), and then executes the aim for V effect (see FIG. 10-43). Set process data for execution.

After that, when the V winning occurs at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability variation determining device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V prize effect (see FIG. 10-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A204 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 5Rth game starts at t13, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A105 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 5Rth round.

After that, when the 5R-th game ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A205 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a variable probability state and a short time state (high probability high base state), but in this state, the CPU 103 changes the effect control command depending on whether the number of pending memories exceeds 0 or not.

For example, at t16, when the number of reserved memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol variation designation to the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the second special symbol (for example, ready-to-win effect, notice effect, etc.) ), and set the process data for executing

On the other hand, when the reserved storage number does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 10-60) that can specify that no game is being played. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image of an initial value (for example, 123) as a decoration pattern or a small pattern, or stops outputting sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 10-60. Any production may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 10-22 is an explanatory diagram showing how the lamp lights. In this embodiment, game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L) , The right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are turned off. Represented by

In the present embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the 4th pattern unit 075F050 are each lit up, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (B). represented in the form of

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are lit/blinking/lit in a manner corresponding to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 10-22(C).

[Production Mode of Pachinko Machine 1]
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. Figures 10-23 to 10-33 and Figures 10-38 to 10-50 are explanatory diagrams showing presentation modes of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 10-23(a), when the losing symbols stop due to the variation of the special symbols in the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. After that, if there is a first reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 system command), background designation command (95 system command), pattern variation designation command (8D system command) to the effect control CPU 120 ), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the first special symbol (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 10-23(b1) to 10-24(b3), the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect in FIG. 10-23(b1) to FIG. It is set based on the pattern variation designation command (8D system command), the display result designation command (8C system command), and the variation pattern designation command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-23(b1) to 10-24(b3) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (b2), in the case of a big hit variation, an image corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (b3), when a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 and turns on the right hand display. Send a command (FD system command). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. 10-24 (c1) to FIG. 10-38 (d2), the effect control CPU 120 uses a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command). Set based on In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-24(c1) to 10-38(d2) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

Here, the fanfare effect will be described in detail. The fanfare production is divided into a plurality of production parts. In the present embodiment, the fanfare effect includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed promotion part. The congratulatory part is a performance part in which a performance for congratulating the winning of a big win is executed. It is displayed, a sound congratulating the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to congratulate the big win. The name display part is an effect part for notifying the player of the start of the big win round by announcing the name of the big win game state that has occurred, as well as informing the player of the type of the big win game state that has occurred. -24 (c2), (c3), as will be described later, a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5, or a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R , the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to correspond to the start of the big win. The right-handed promotion part is a performance part that encourages the player to hit right-handedly, and uses image display of characters and graphics as described later with reference to FIGS. A large right-handed promotion performance is executed to prompt the player to hit right. The effect control CPU 120 receives a symbol determination designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the big hit symbols are stopped and the symbols are determined, and then receives a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , the fanfare performance is started, and the fanfare is performed until the normal big winning opening is opened and the big winning round is started.

As shown in FIG. 10-24(c1), an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!") is displayed as a congratulatory part in the fanfare production to congratulate the player on winning the jackpot. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so that it is displayed on the device 5, the sound congratulating the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode congratulates the big win. or In addition, as a right-handed promotion effect, an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and characters (in this example, the characters "right-handed") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5 to promote small right-handed hitting. A performance is performed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers and can display a predetermined image on each layer. As shown in FIG. 10-24(c1), the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is an image congratulating a big hit (in this example, a character image and "Congratulations!"). is displayed on the layer on the front side (in the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side) than the character image of . In addition, in the fanfare effect, a sound that encourages right-handed hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-handed promotional effect, the right-handed display portion 075F030 and right-handed display portion 075F055 are lit in a manner that encourages right-handed hitting. (Lighting in this example). Note that the order of starting the above-described image display, lighting, etc. is as follows. First, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0-system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD-system command) after design determination, and lights up the right-handed display portion 075F030. The production control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), while the received big hit start designation command (A0-series command), small right handed promotion performance The image display device 5 is caused to display an image consisting of graphics and characters in , and an image congratulating the winning of the jackpot. At this time, the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right hitting promotion performance located further to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the big win. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right-handed display portion 075F030 and the right-handed display portion 075F055, and then the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the image congratulating the big hit are displayed in this order. An image is displayed. In addition, the display of images consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 are determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. is done until At that time, first, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display extinguishing designation command together with a background designating command after design determination, and turns off the right-handed display portion 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display extinguishing designation command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion performance based on the received background designation command. When the process ends, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5 . It should be noted that the image consisting of graphics and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting by the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 may start and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of graphics and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect coincides with the lighting period of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055. becomes easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare effect, a part of the name image indicating the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS !!" "CHANCE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, sounds corresponding to the start of the big win are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamps 9 are lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big win. The lighting mode changes.

As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c3), as a name display part in the fanfare effect, following FIG. “BONUS!!” in the character image of “CHANCE BONUS!!” is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5 . As a result, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off once before the large right-handed promotion performance to be executed in the right-handed promotion part of the fanfare performance starting from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 10-24 (c4) to FIG. 10-33 (c29), a graphic (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and a character (in this example, the character “Right-handed”) ) in the center of the image display device 5 in a large size.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare effect and the big right hitting promotion effect based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIGS. 10-34 to 10-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121 . For example, based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table, the effect control CPU 120 emits guidance light to urge the player to hit to the right by moving the light emitting position of the frame lamp. In the present embodiment, the light-emitting location literally refers to a location that emits light. A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is extinguished) is not called a light-emitting location. In another example, the light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness. A location may be called a location, but a location where a lamp that is lit with a luminance lower than that of a lamp positioned at the light emission location is not referred to as a light emission location. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the effect control CPU 120 will be specifically described.

FIG. 10-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-34, the parent table in the lighting data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable body lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, board left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the fanfare effect and the hard right hitting promotion effect are defined respectively. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then a hard right hitting promotion effect for 2000 msec. Since the large right hitting promotion effect is configured to be repeated a plurality of times (twice in the present embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 repeats the 2000 msec long right hitting promotion effect twice. Become.

FIG. 10-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-35, in the child table of the lighting data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is subdivided into the fanfare effect and the right-handed promotion effect, and is referenced in each time period. grandchild table is specified.

Here, regarding the big right hitting promotion effect, the grandchild table W11 common to both the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L is designated. In addition, since the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are turned off without being used in the big right hitting promotion effect, a grandchild table is not provided. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. As for the attacker lamp 9c, the 2000 msec, which is the execution time for the promotion effect of hitting to the right, is subdivided into a plurality of periods, and a plurality of grandchild tables are specified. For example, grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

10-36 and 10-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of grandchild tables in the lighting data table. FIG. 10-36 shows the data in grandchild table W11 for Frame Right Lamp 075F009R and Frame Left Lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 10-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data are defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec. , data for turning off (0x000000) is defined. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 10B are defined for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. In FIG. 10-36, for each lamp included in the frame lamp, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are shown in order to clearly show the lighting period. A dashed circle mark is attached to it.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, first at T1, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, then at T2 the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, and then at T3 the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit. The second lamp lights up, then at T4 the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T5 the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T6 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. The lamp lights up, then at T7 the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. Then, at T10, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting to light, each lamp continues to light while changing its color to seven colors. After that, first at T46, the fourth lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T47 the third lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T48 the second lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then At T52, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T53, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, at T54, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T55. The seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T56, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. After that, each lamp is extinguished until 2000 msec in the one-time large right-handed promotion effect elapses. After all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, the remaining time is only about 320 msec. T57). The first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the frame right lamp 075F009R are extinguished at all times.

Using the grandchild table W11 storing the data as described above, as shown in FIGS. , frame right lamp 075F009R up to the eighth lamp, the frame lamp lights up in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 10-37 shows the data in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild table A11a-A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data are defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec. Data indicating that the lamp is turned off (0x000000) is defined. In the grandchild table K11, for the movable body lamp 9d, of the characters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, left X (left X), middle X (middle X), right X (right X) Data are provided for each of the In FIG. 10-37, for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000 ) are marked with dashed circles.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first, at T3, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on, then at T4, the X lamp in the movable body lamp 9d is turned on, and then at T5, the movable body lamp is turned on. The right X lamp of 9d lights up. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light while changing its color to seven colors. After that, first, at T48, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, then at T49, the X lamp in the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, and then at T50, the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off. lights out. After that, each lamp is extinguished until 2000 msec in one large right-handed promotion effect has passed. In addition, after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, the remaining time is only about 320 msec. (T57). Further, when compared with the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain turned off) and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

10-25(c4) to 10-32(c24), the fourth and third lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L are While the movable body lamp 9d is lit, the movable body lamp 9d is turned off. After that, at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned on, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on, and then the middle X and right X lamps are turned on. lights up, each lamp continues to light in seven colors thereafter, and at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out. lights out. As a result, the movable lamp 9d is illuminated in seven colors, starting from the left X lighting, then the middle X lamp, and the right X lamp, so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the movable body lamp 9d is performed twice.

FIG. 10-37 also shows the data in the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined over a very long time of 600000 msec with respect to 330 msec to be turned on. Data of (0x000000) is defined.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data are defined at intervals of 20 msec for 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b defines only one pattern color change for 280 nsec. ing. That is, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the attacker lamp 9c over 280 nsec each time the grandchild table A11b is referred to once in 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until 1350 msec is completed, and performs a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of repeating color changes.

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data are defined over a very long time of 600000 msec for the lighting target of 320 msec. there is

When the large right-hand hitting promotion effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then controls the grandchild table A11b at intervals of 280 nsec for 1350 msec. is referenced multiple times to cause the attacker lamp 9c to repeat a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change, and then the grandchild table A11c is referenced over the last 320 msec to turn off the attacker lamp 9c. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), the frame lamps are illuminated in an arch from left to right, and soon the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned on. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c lights up, then the frame lamps go out in an arch from the left to the right. becomes extinguished. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

Also, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, where the light is turned off at the beginning, the color of the predetermined pattern is repeated in the middle, and the light is turned off after that, the lighting of the attacker lamp 9c is turned on three times. Scenarios are divided into stages, and the same grandchild table A11b is repeatedly referred to for the repetition of the predetermined pattern color in the middle, so that there is no need to prepare data for the entire time from the beginning to the end of lighting for 2000 msec. , it is sufficient to prepare data only for the repeated part. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 10-25(c4), description will be given of the rendering mode in the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part of the fanfare effect. As shown in FIG. 10-25(c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-25(c5), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-26(c6), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-26(c7), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, X in the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-26(c8), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-27(c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 10-27(c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-28(c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-28(c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c15), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "RIGHT" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. After that, the attacker lamp 9c repeatedly turns on and off (that is, blinks). Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-29(c16), the image display device 5 continues to display the character image of "RIGHT" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c17), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c18), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, X in the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c19), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c20), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the board right lamp 075F009F is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the flashing attacker lamp 9c is also extinguished. Sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R also stops. As a result, the series of the first large right-handed promotion effect is completed.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c26), the second big right-handed promotion effect is started. At this time, as for the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. It should be noted that, in the second hard hitting to the right promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the right hitting promotion effect. As a result, when the transition is made to the jackpot round after the end of the big-right hitting promotion effect, the BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) during the big-win round does not overlap with the sound in the big-right hitting promotion effect. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second hard hitting promotion effect, the game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/extinguishes in the same manner as in the first hard hitting promotion effect. During this time, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and graphics than the small right-handed promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to hit right in a more emphatic manner than the small right-handed promotion effect. be. Therefore, the player can be urged to hit the right hand in an easy-to-understand manner by executing the large right-hand hitting promotion effect during the fanfare effect.

In addition, in the first big right-handed promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds (e.g., queuing sound effect) in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance, which is effective for the player. While it is possible to encourage right-handed hitting, in the second big right-handed promotion performance, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance, so that the BGM during the big winning round that starts thereafter. can be prevented from interfering with

In addition, in the large right-handed promotion performance, the arrow image and the character image are displayed so as to gradually appear in stages, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks to effectively encourage right-handed hitting. The effect is more flashy than the effect of displaying the name image of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2). For example, the character images appear one by one in the big right hitting promotion effect, but all the character images appear at once in the name image of the big win game state. In addition, as for the size of the character image in the big right hitting promotion effect, the character image in the name image in the big win game state is larger than all the character images. Furthermore, the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect of displaying the name image. Thus, after the name image of the big winning game state is displayed to inform the player of the big winning, the player can be informed of the right hitting by the big right hitting promoting performance with emphasis.

The attacker lamp 9c is a place where the player actually carries the game ball and is aimed at when the game ball is shot. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the place to aim. The attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color such as seven colors without flashing.

In the following example, the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs will be described. Although the number of rounds is different for the 10R probability variable jackpot, other effects are the same as the 5R probability variable jackpot. Also, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V notice effect and the V winning prize effect are not executed, but the other effects are the same as the 5R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished and the second round of the big right-handed promotion effect ends, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c27), switching to the big hit round is performed. Start. Specifically, the visibility is gradually lowered by fading out the arrow image and the character image of "Right shot!". The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. In addition, the display of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-out. Incidentally, as described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), a series of effect data up to the stage of FIG. 10-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the 1Rth. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-39(d3) to 10-40(e4) on the basis of the special prize opening open specifying command (A101 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-39 (d3) to 10-40 (e4) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from the state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 is completely white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. In addition, the display of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade-in" and "fade-out" will be specifically described. Fade-in and fade-out are a kind of effect in image display called "transition". A "transition" is a transition inserted between the first cut (image) and the second cut (image) when the scene of the video changes from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It's about the effect. In addition to fade-in and fade-out, transitions include various methods in video editing such as wipe and overlap.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, in fade-in, the transparency (also referred to as transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to a second degree (for example, 0%) that is lower than the first degree. % or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, use 1 second between 0 and 1 second to gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 50%, The next 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds is used to gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) from 50% to 0% (second degree). On the other hand, as in the method of changing the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) to opaque, it takes a predetermined time to change the transparency (transparency). rate) is not fade-in. Note that when changing the opacity (also referred to as opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), the above % values are reversed. That is, in fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the second degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) over a predetermined period of time.

“Fade-out” is an effect in which an image representing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, in fade-out, the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). %) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second, The transparency (transmittance) is then gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, like the method of changing the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) to transparent, it takes a predetermined time to change the transparency (transparency). rate) is not faded out. In addition, when changing the opacity (opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), fade-out changes the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0% or 1%) over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparency When the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 0%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually increased to 100%. The image is made transparent in stages to make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-38(d2), the player sees only the white image in the second layer of the screen, which is positioned deeper than the first layer of the screen. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is set to 0%. The background image during the big win round is gradually made opaque to make it easy to see (fade-in). As a result, the player is shown the background image during the big win round on the first layer located in front of the second layer on the screen.

There is also a technique called "crossfade" as a transition. Cross-fading is, for example, fading out the first layer of the screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located behind the first layer. In terms of appearance, this is a method of showing the second layer of the screen after showing the first layer of the screen. On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, as described above, the first layer of the screen is faded out and then faded in, so that the white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located on the back side is displayed. is displayed once in the middle of switching from the image in the first period of the ED to the image in the second period of the ED.

In the present embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the transition as described above is executed, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed in the upper right of the screen is not affected by the switching display of the background image. Display is maintained without being affected. Here, "affected by switching display of the background image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the promotion effect of hitting the small right due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out. The visibility of the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or lowered, such as the player can see the image of the small right-handed promotion effect a little but cannot understand the meaning (right-handed promotion) indicated by the image. It means that the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-described phenomenon does not occur and the visibility of the player's visibility of the image of the small right-throwing promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, the image of the small right-throwing promotion effect is not the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), after the background image during the big win round appears by fading in, as shown in FIG. , a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . At the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big win round is displayed. Furthermore, an image (an arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. In addition, BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the big win round) starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. It should be noted that, as described above, at the time this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right-hand hitting promotion effect has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e2), during 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the image of the effect promoting small right hitting is displayed in the upper right ( arrows and letters) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e3), when the 1Rth is finished, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A201 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e4), between the rounds, the big prize opening is normally kept closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An image (an arrow and a character) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A102 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 2Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 10-41 (e5) to 10-42 (e8), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIG. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-41 (e5) to 10-42 (e8) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the upper right continues. , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e6), during 2R, the V probability variation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, an image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and a text image of "PUSH!!" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to be superimposed on the background image corresponding to the during-round effect. In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode according to the production during the round (such as a V probability variation suggestive production). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the production during the round (such as the V probability variation suggestive production).

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability variation suggestive effect, the V A character image of "Success!" In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode according to the production during the round (such as a V probability variation suggestive production). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the production during the round (such as the V probability variation suggestive production).

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e8), when the 2nd round is finished, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A202 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e9), between the rounds, the big prize opening is normally kept closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Succeeded!!” is displayed, and further, an image (arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 3Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 10-42 (e10) to FIG. 10-43 (e12), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) to FIG. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-42 (e10) to FIG. 10-43 (e12) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal big winning opening is opened and the V announcement effect is executed. Specifically, a character image and a character image of "Grab the V in the next round!" In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as V notice performance).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e11), during the 3R, the V notice effect is continuously executed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5, together with the character image. A character image of "Catch the V in the next round!" is displayed, and further, an image (arrow and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as V notice performance).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e12), when the 3rd round ends, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. On the other hand, based on the command from CPU103, the production control CPU 120 executes the production aiming at V between the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round.

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), between rounds, the effect of aiming at V is executed while the big winning hole is closed, that is, the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole. Specifically, the V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large), which is the target (place) to be aimed by the player by hitting to the right, is superimposed on the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An arrow image pointing to the winning slot) and a character image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the "Aim for V" effect, it is possible to prompt the player to hit rightward so as to enter the game ball into the V big winning hole by using the image display related to the V big winning hole. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A104 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4Rth based on the command from the CPU 104 . 10-44 (e14) and (e15), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIG. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-44 (e14) to FIG. 10-44 (e15) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V big prize opening is opened, and the effect of aiming for V is continuously executed. As a result, the player can aim at the V big winning hole by hitting right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15), during 4R, the "Aim for V" effect is executed, and an image (an arrow and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is subsequently displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

When a game ball enters the V big winning opening and a V winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits a probability variation determining device passing designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU120, the data of each effect of Figure 10-44 (e16) ~ Figure 10-45 (e18), set based on the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-44 (e16) to 10-45 (e18) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), when the V winning effect is executed, the background image corresponding to the mid-round effect is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to indicate that the V winning has occurred. V" image is displayed, and an image (an arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is subsequently displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V winning performance). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (such as the V winning effect).

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e17), when the 4th round is finished, the V big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A204 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e18), between the rounds, the V big prize opening and the normal big prize opening remain closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and furthermore, the image (arrow and character) of the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A105 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 5Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 10-45 (e19) to FIG. 10-46 (e21), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect in accordance with the special winning opening open specification command (A105 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-45 (e19) to 10-46 (e21) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e20), during the 5R, the round middle effect is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect continues to the upper right. (arrow and letter) is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e21), when the 5th round is completed, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A205 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after that, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-46 (f1) to 10-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-46 (f1) to 10-47 (f4) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1), when the ending effect starts, an image for selecting a stage in the variable probability state after the big win game state is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f2), during the ending production, the character image and the name image indicating the name of the probability changing state (in this example, the character image of “Yume Yume RUSH!!”) are displayed on the image display device 5. displayed in the center. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f3), during the ending effect, the addiction suppression notification effect is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Beware of getting addicted. Pachinko is a game to be enjoyed moderately." Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. It should be noted that, during the winning streak, a game result image showing the game result (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) in the jackpot game state is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending effect, but at the time of the first win. Also in , such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f4), a forget-to-take prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from forgetting to take a card such as a prepaid card or membership card related to the game. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the end of the ending effect, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), and a symbol variation designation to the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative design in response to the variation in the second special design, or effects during variation in accordance with the variation in the second special design (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 10-48 (g1) and (g2), the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect in FIG. (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-48 (g1) and (g2) progresses with the passage of time rather than being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g1), even during the variation of the second special symbol, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g2), the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lost symbol is displayed. Also at this time, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols.

After the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. , a symbol variation designation command (8D system command), a display result designation command (8C system command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative design in response to the variation in the second special design, or effects during variation in accordance with the variation in the second special design (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 10-48 (g3) to FIG. 10-49 (g5), the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect of FIG. 10-48 (g3) to FIG. It is set based on the pattern variation designation command (8D system command), the display result designation command (8C system command), and the variation pattern designation command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-48 (g3) to 10-49 (g5) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g3), even during the variation of the second special symbol, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g4), in the case of a big hit variation, an image corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, A game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win performance. On the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), the group announcement effect is executed as the announcement effect during the big hit variation. The group notice effect is that objects such as characters appear on the screen of the image display device 5 step by step or all at once to make the visibility of the ready-to-win pattern difficult, and then the object disappears to show the specific pattern. It is a production that makes matching (for example, 777 etc.) appear. Even if a notice effect that makes the visibility of the pattern difficult is executed in such a reach mode, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect ( arrows and letters) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of the effect image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the effect to promote the small right shot or the player cannot see the image of the effect to promote the small right shot due to the display of the effect image such as the group notice. The player's visibility of the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the player's ability to see the image of the production, but the player cannot understand the meaning of the image (promotion of right-handed play). It means that the player's visibility is given some influence. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-described phenomenon does not occur and the visibility of the player's visibility of the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is different from the effect image. It can be said that it is not affected by the display.

When the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g6), as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, when a big hit (10R probability variable big hit) occurs, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. Note that the right-handed display lighting command (FD system command) is not transmitted because the right-handed promotion effect has already been executed. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103 . Incidentally, the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-50 (h1) and (h2) progresses with the passage of time rather than being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h1), as a fanfare effect, an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yah! Also, a sound congratulating a big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting mode for congratulating a big win. On the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-50(h2), after the fanfare effect is started, the image display device 5 displays a name image (character image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!" , a sound corresponding to the start of the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to correspond to the start of the big win. In addition, in the case of consecutive wins with the special figure 2 hit, since the big right hitting promotion effect has already been executed at the time of the special figure 1 win, the big right hitting promotion effect is not executed again. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. , the frame lamp does not light up in a mode corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the 1Rth.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, the background image corresponding to the round effect is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the upper right continues. , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

Thereafter, although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIGS. 10-40 to 10-46, various effects such as a V notice effect, a V aiming effect, and a V winning effect are executed during the round, and when the jackpot round ends soon. , ending effects are executed as shown in FIGS. 10-46 and 10-47. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-48, it is again controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state. In this series of games, on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed, and a right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern Each of the right-handed indicators 075F055 of the unit 075F050 continues to light up. Eventually, when the variable probability state after the jackpot game state ends without the occurrence of a jackpot and the state is controlled to the normal state, a right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 103 The CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hitting display part 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Each of the parts 075F055 is turned off. As a result, the player hits to the left again in the normal state.

[Aspect of performance of pachinko game machine 1 when power is restored]
FIG. 10-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when power is restored during the fanfare effect due to winning one special figure. 10-51, as shown in FIG. 10-20, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during fanfare production and then the power supply is restored. .

As shown in FIG. 10-51, a state in which an image (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations!") congratulating the big hit is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-24 (c2) ), a state in which only the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-28 (c14)), and an arrow image in the large right-handed promotion performance together with the arrow image “Right-handed! !” is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-31 (c23)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. After that, when the power is turned on, a character image of "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a large winning opening open designation command (A101 command) from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command) is received, the large winning opening open designation. Based on the command (A101 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 1R as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1). In addition, an image congratulating a big hit (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!"), a name image indicating the name of the big win gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS!!"). character image), the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect, and the character image of "Right-handed!"

In this way, even if power failure occurs before the large right-hand promotion effect is executed or until the large right-hand promotion effect is completed, the small right-hand promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on after that. Therefore, it is possible to at least encourage the player to hit the ball to the right immediately after the power failure, and it is not possible to enter the game ball into the main prize hole if the player forgets to hit the ball to the right. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player the disadvantage of

FIG. 10-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during one round of the jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. 10-52, as shown in FIG. 10-20, assume power interruption 2 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 1R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-52, in the state where the image corresponding to the effect in 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. If prize balls are obtained during subsequent rounds, points may be added starting from 0 points again, such as adding 10 points for every 10 balls obtained. It should be noted that the point image is not limited to being displayed at 0pt after recovery from power failure, and the point may not be recognized by a predetermined image such as "??"

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done.

FIG. 10-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when power is restored during the round after one big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 10-53 is the power interruption 3 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-53, in the state where the image corresponding to the effect between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-40 (e4)), when power failure occurs, After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure during two rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. 10-54, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 2R, and then power interruption 4 is assumed when the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-54, when an image corresponding to the V probability variation suggestive effect in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-41 (e7)), when power failure occurs, the image After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120, effect control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), to execute the V notice effect as shown in Fig. 10-42 (e10). can also be configured to

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done.

FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the electricity is restored between two rounds after two rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 10-55 is the power interruption 5 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-55, in the state where the image corresponding to the round after 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of (e9) in FIG. 10-42), when power failure occurs, the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120, effect control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), to execute the V notice effect as shown in Fig. 10-42 (e10). can also be configured to

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the mode of presentation of the pachinko game machine in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after three rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. As shown in FIG. 10-21, the power outage shown in FIG. 10-56 is the power outage 6 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the round after the 3R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-56, in the state where the image corresponding to the round after 3R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of (e13) in FIG. 10-43), when power failure occurs, the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A104 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A104 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image during 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption. Also, since the stored data about the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120, performance control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), executes the effect of aiming at V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14). It can also be configured as

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as being unable to enter the game ball into the V big winning opening in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can.

FIG. 10-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the 4 rounds of the big win at the time of winning 1 special figure. 10-57, as shown in FIG. 10-21, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-57, the state where the image corresponding to the effect of aiming for the V in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-44 (e15)), or the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-44 (e16)), when the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the power is turned on to display "Restoring...". is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A105 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 5R as shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done. Furthermore, as in 4R, when power is cut off while the aiming effect for V and the small right-hand promotion effect are being executed, and as shown in FIG. In the case where power is cut off while the right-handed promotion effect is being executed, both of them are common to each other, and after returning from the power failure, aim for V and the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, while the small right-handed promotion effect is not executed. is minimally performed. Therefore, in any situation, it is possible to at least prompt the player to hit to the right immediately after recovery from the power failure in a manner common to all situations.

FIG. 10-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure between rounds after four rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 10-58 is the power interruption 8 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-58, when power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-45 (e18)) between the rounds after 4R. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption.

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during the final round of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. 10-59, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off during 5R, and then the power cut-off 9 is assumed when the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-59, the state in which the image corresponding to the effect during the round in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state in FIG. 10-46 (e20)), or the state after the end of 5R (FIG. 10 -46 (e21)), the image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and then the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command), it responds to the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). Based on this, the image display device 5 is caused to display an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1).

In this way, even if power is cut off during the final round of the big win, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that. It is possible to encourage hitting to the right and to prevent forgetting to hit to the right as much as possible.

FIG. 10-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during the ending effect at the time of winning one special figure. 10-60, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the power interruption 10 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during the ending performance and then the power supply is restored is assumed. .

As shown in FIG. 10-60, the state in which the image for selecting the stage in the probability changing state after the jackpot game state among the ending effects is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-46 (f1)), the character A state in which a name image indicating the name of the variable probability state is displayed together with the image on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-47 (f2)), showing an image corresponding to the immersion suppression notification effect and the result of the game in the jackpot game state. A game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-47 (f3)), and a forget-to-take prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to take a card is displayed on the image display device 5. If a power failure occurs in any of the displayed states (the state of (f4) in FIG. 10-47), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Restoring..." is displayed by turning on the power. is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, if there is a reserved memory number, the effect control CPU 120 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 system command, C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a symbol variation designation command (8D system command) from the CPU 103 , display result designation command (8C series command) and variation pattern designation command (81 series command) are received, and when these commands are received, reserved storage number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), Based on the background designation command (95 series command), pattern variation designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and variation pattern designation command (81 series command), Figure 10-48 (g1) The image display device 5 is caused to display a performance image corresponding to such a variation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory number, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and when these commands are received, the background Based on the specified command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demonstration specified command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored while the initial pattern (in this example, "123" as the decorative pattern and the small pattern) is stopped. .

In this way, even if the power is cut off during the ending, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible, such as not being able to enter the second start winning port in a probability variable state after a big win game state due to forgetting to hit to the right. be able to.

[Main Effects Obtained by Characteristic Portion 075F]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the characterizing portion 075F described above are individually listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)), and A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
After that, while the first guidance display is ended, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. On the other hand, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the effect suggesting hitting the small right),
After that, while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, aim at V as shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13). The part where the image display corresponding to the production is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion production is continued),
After that, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued even after the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area becomes the state in which the game medium can enter the specific area (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-44 (e15), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are continued),
After that, when the game medium enters the specific area, the second guidance display is continued while the third guidance display is ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), aim for V While ending the image display corresponding to , the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect (while the display is being performed), and when the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15)) During the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting effect, the power failure occurs and the power is recovered from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." is displayed after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57). The part where the character image and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

(1-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
After that, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 10-38 (d1), (d2 ), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated, while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion performance is continued),
After that, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 10-43 As shown in (e13), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion effect is continued),
After that, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, FIG. 10-44 ( As shown in e15), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim for the V effect and the image display corresponding to the suggestive effect of hitting the small right are continued),
After that, in conjunction with the entry of the game medium into the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16)). While ending the image display corresponding to the aiming effect, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect (while the display is being performed), and when the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15)) During the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting effect, the power failure occurs and the power is recovered from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." is displayed after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57). The part where the character image and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

(1-3) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
After that, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, a command for specifying during the opening of a large winning opening (A101 command), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 10-38 As shown in (d1) and (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect is continued),
After that, by receiving a command after the 3R ends (for example, a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning hole), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 10-43 As shown in (e13), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion effect is continued),
After that, by receiving a 4R opening command (for example, a command for specifying during the opening of a large winning opening (A104 command), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, in FIG. 10-44 (e15) As shown, the part where the image display corresponding to the Aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are continued),
After that, by receiving a V passage command (for example, a probability variation determination device passage specification command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 10-44 As shown in (e16), the part where the image display corresponding to the "Aim for the V" effect is finished, while the image display corresponding to the "Short right hit suggesting effect" is continued),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect (while the display is being performed), and when the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15)) During the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting effect, the power failure occurs and the power is recovered from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." is displayed after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57). The part where the character image and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

Specifically, during execution of the fanfare effect, the player is encouraged to hit right in subsequent games by executing a large right-handed promotion effect and a small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize right-handed promotion. It is possible to prevent the player from appealing to the player for excessive hitting to the right by surely recognizing it, and then ending the large right-handed promotion performance while continuing the small right-handed promotion performance as it is. In addition, the effect of aiming for the V to aim at the V big prize mouth is executed from the time when the V big prize mouth is still closed, and by continuing as it is after the V big prize mouth is opened, the V To appeal to a player the importance of aiming at the big winning hole and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. In addition, after the V prize is generated and the V big prize opening is closed, the effect of aiming for the V is terminated, thereby preventing unnecessary promotion notification from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-described flow, since the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed, the player is instructed to always hit right-handed even after the V prize is generated from before the V big prize opening is opened. can be encouraged. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right. Also, when a power failure occurs during the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect and the power is restored from the power failure, it corresponds to the aim V effect. When the power failure occurs while the image display and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed and the power is restored, after the power is turned on, the character image of "Restoring ..." and the small Since the image of the right-handed promotion performance is displayed, the player can be urged to continue to right-handed in the subsequent game even if the power failure occurs.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process for executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120),
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 ( c1) image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the first guidance display and the Performing the second guidance display (for example, image display corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect and image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
During the period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-39 (e1) to 10-46 (e21) The part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued while the image display corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect is not performed during the round),
In the special state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the big hit as shown in FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49 The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect in the variable state),
The second guidance display is not affected by background image switching display (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the portion where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and fade-out),
The second guide display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect) (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5). The part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by).

Specifically, during execution of the fanfare effect, the player is encouraged to hit right in subsequent games by executing a large right-handed promotion effect and a small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize right-handed promotion. To prevent a player from appealing to a player for excessive hitting to the right by surely recognizing it and continuing the small right-handed promotion performance while ending the large right-handed promotion performance during the subsequent big winning round. can be done. Further, the player can be urged to always hit to the right by continuously executing the small right-hand hitting promotion effect even in the variable probability state or the time-saving state after the end of the big win game state. Furthermore, after the occurrence of the big hit, the switching display (fade-out, fade-in, etc.) performed when switching to the big-hit round after the fanfare production is executed does not affect the small right-hand hitting promotion effect, and the big-hit game state is not affected. Since the small right-hand hitting promotion performance is not affected by the image display by the group notice performance performed in the variable probability state or the time-saving state after finishing, the player can always be urged to hit right. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the part where the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state (Figs. 10-25 to 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. In conjunction with this, the frame lamps are lit in an arch from the left side to the right side twice),
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among a plurality of times of guidance light emission (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29), the second time A portion that does not output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion production when the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion production),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, after the start of the big hit round as shown in FIG. The part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
In a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. When it becomes, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R respond to a large right-handed promotion effect part that does not output sound in a certain way).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the lighting position of the lamp by the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hitting. can be encouraged to Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right. Second time), when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so the sound during the big win round that is output after the execution of the large right-handed promotion performance is performed. A player can smoothly hear the BGM during the big winning round without being affected by the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting against the BGM. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked thereto is not output, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized mode. can be prevented from feeling troublesome. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the part where the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state (Figs. 10-25 to 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. In conjunction with this, the frame lamps are lit in an arch from the left side to the right side twice),
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among a plurality of times of guidance light emission (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29), the second time A portion that does not output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion production when the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion production),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, after the start of the big hit round as shown in FIG. The part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
The guidance means, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display When the specific display result is obtained, the guide light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the frame lamp is a large right-handed promotion effect The part that does not light up in a manner according to the condition).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the lighting position of the lamp by the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hitting. can be encouraged to Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right. Second time), when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so the sound during the big win round that is output after the execution of the large right-handed promotion performance is performed. A player can smoothly hear the BGM during the big winning round without being affected by the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting against the BGM. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed as in , and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the part where the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state (Figs. 10-25 to 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means performs the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance display after turning off the light emission means (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the frame lamp is lit in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the display of the image corresponding to the promotion effect),
The sound output means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission (for example, FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. As shown in 10-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
Thereafter, in a state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R will be used to promote a large right-handed hit. part that does not output sound in a corresponding manner).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. Also, during the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting position of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so it is easier to understand and effective. The player can be urged to hit right. Furthermore, when the frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right, so that the player is urged to hit to the right by the sound as well. can be done. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked thereto is not output, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized mode. can be prevented from feeling troublesome. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the part where the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state (Figs. 10-25 to 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guiding means are
After turning off the light emitting means, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. The part that lights up the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display),
Thereafter, in a state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the guide light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the frame lamp corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect part that does not light up in the mode).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. Also, during the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting position of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so it is easier to understand and effective. The player can be urged to hit right. Furthermore, when the frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right, so that the player is urged to hit to the right by the sound as well. can be done. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed as in , and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(5) The second guidance display is displayed in a manner that is emphasized more than the name display of the advantageous state that is part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-hand hitting promotion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33 has a larger character image than the display of the name image in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. In addition, characters appear step by step, the execution time is long, and they are displayed in an emphasized manner. As a result, it is possible to emphasize to the player that he should hit to the right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission,
Not outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the midway guide light emission among the guide light emission of a plurality of times,
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the guidance light emission for a plurality of times.

Specifically, among a plurality of right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps, sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotional effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, but the second right-handed promotion is output. As for the subsequent right-handed promotion, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. In addition, the sound is not output in conjunction with the promotion of the second and subsequent right strokes. In other words, the sound data for promoting the right-handed stroke includes only the sound data associated with the first right-handed promotion. Thus, the BGM during the big winning round is smoothly delivered to the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting to the BGM during the big winning round output after the execution of the large right-hand hitting promotion performance. can be heard.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission,
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the midway guide light emission among the guide light emission of a plurality of times,
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the guidance light emission for a plurality of times.

Specifically, among a plurality of right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps, sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion. Sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the promotion of hitting to the right, but the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R for the final right-handed promotion. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are interlocked with the first and second right-handed promotions based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. The sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of the third right stroke, and the sound is not output. In other words, the sound data for right-handed promotion effect includes only sound data associated with each of the first and second right-handed promotions. It should be noted that the sound data includes only sound data linked to promoting right-handed hitting for one time, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute two loops of the sound data linked to promoting right-handed hitting for one time. . Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data interlocked with promoting right-handed hitting twice, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute the sound data interlocked with promoting right-handed hitting twice. . Thus, the BGM during the big winning round is smoothly delivered to the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting to the BGM during the big winning round output after the execution of the large right-hand hitting promotion performance. can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and after turning off all of the plurality of lamps, emits the guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-25 (c3)). As shown in , after all the lamps of the frame lamp are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner according to the large right hitting promotion effect).

Specifically, after all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion performance, so that the player is urged to hit right in an easy-to-understand and effective manner. can be done.

(9) the light emitting means emits guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display based on data defined by a lighting data table;
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 10-34) that defines the execution time of the guidance light emission, and a child table (for example, , child tables shown in FIGS. 10-35) and the corresponding grandchild tables (for example, child tables shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamps 9 including the frame lamps refer to the parent table to specify the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect, and refer to the child table to select the grandchild table in which the lighting data is defined. Lighting/blinking/extinguishing is performed by specifying and referring to the grandchild table. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently lit in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) Of the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not emit guidance light is not defined as the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are turned off without being used in the big right hitting promotion effect, so a grandchild table is provided. No. As a result, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guiding means performs the guiding light emission by sequentially moving the light emitting locations of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, FIGS. 10-25 to 10- 33, the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area, thereby executing a large right-handed promotion effect. By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to hit to the right in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guiding means emits the guiding light while changing the light emission color of the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights the frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp executes a large right-hand hitting promotion effect while lighting in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to hit right.

(13) The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display by fade-in and fade-out as switching display of the background image performed in relation to the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fading in and fading out).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-38(d1) to 10-39(d4), the effect to promote hitting a small right is to switch the background image by fading in and out when switching from the fanfare effect to the big win round. It continues without being affected by the display. As a result, even if the fanfare effect is switched to the jackpot round by switching display of the background image, the player can be urged to continue hitting to the right.

(14) The second guidance display is not affected by the display in the advance notice effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, FIG. 10 -49 (g5), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the image display by the group notice effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), the small right hitting promotion effect influences the display in the notice effect suggesting that a big hit will occur in the probability variable state after the end of the big win advantageous state. continue without As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the notice effect, the arrow image and the character image in the small right hitting promotion effect will continue to be displayed without impeding visibility. The player can be urged to hit right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2)). Thus, in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and the frame lamp is in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production. part that does not light up).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, a mode according to the large right hitting promotion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the first hit. , and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the promotion of hitting to the right in a manner that is frequently emphasized.

[Modified example of characteristic part 075F]
A modification of the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F described above will be described.

(About turning off the light before the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-25(c3), after all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. , not all lamps are turned off, and some lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) that is first lit in the big right-handed promotion effect may be lit. By doing so, it is possible to show well the connection when the frame lamps are subsequently turned on in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect of hitting to the right.

(About the switching display during the jackpot round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (d1) to 10-39 (d4), as a switching display during the big hit round, when switching from the fanfare effect to the big hit round, fade-in and fade-out Although the execution of switching display of the background image has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a presentation effect such as white-out inserting a pure white screen or black-out inserting a pitch-black screen between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round may be used.

Also, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (music) may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen may be switched.

Further, as the switching display during the big win round, a mode selection screen for selecting the performance mode may be displayed, and the background image may be switched to the mode corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen.

In any case, even if a special switching display is performed during the big winning round, it is sufficient that the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is not affected.

(Regarding the display of the effect image in the variable probability state after the jackpot game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), as the display of the effect image in the probability changing state after the big hit game ball state, the image display by the group notice effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the variable probability state after the state of the jackpot game ball, a white-out effect in which a pure white screen is inserted during the ready-to-win effect, or a black-out effect in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used. It may be possible to use the effect of pseudo continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or the visibility of the decorative pattern is difficult by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. It is also possible to use a presentation effect that makes the In any case, even if a special effect display is performed in the variable probability state after the big hit game ball state, the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect should be unaffected.

(About aiming for V)
In this embodiment, as the specific area, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified. As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V grand prize opening was displayed. However, not limited to this, the image display in the Aim for V effect, which is the third guide display using the image display related to the specific area, is not limited to pointing to the V big prize opening itself, but also pointing to the vicinity of the V big prize opening. Alternatively, it may refer to a path leading to the V big prize winning opening, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V big winning opening located on the upstream side of the V big winning opening.

(Regarding the promotion of hitting the right hand)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-25(c4) to 10-31(c23), the graphic image of the arrow appears first, and then the character image of "Right-handed!!" appears. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the character image "Right shot!" may appear first, and then the graphic image of the arrow may appear. Further, the image display of the large right hitting promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display of the small right hitting promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display. may consist of only an arrow image or only a character image.

(About favorable conditions)
In the present embodiment, the period shown in FIGS. 10-24 (c1) to 10-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 10-20 to t16 in FIG. 10-21 ) was exemplified, but it is not limited to this. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" is the period excluding the fanfare production period, that is, the period shown in FIGS. period until t16). Further, the fanfare effect and the big-right hitting promotion effect may be executed during a period (symbol confirmation period) in which the symbol for the occurrence of the big hit is confirmed.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of the first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit with one special figure, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and a frame lamp is in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production. However, it is not limited to this. For example, depending on the type of jackpot in one special figure, the mode of the large right hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be varied. For example, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the big hit in the special figure 1 is a variable hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion production. You may output a sound in a form. In addition, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production. may not be output.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of consecutive chan per special figure 2)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp does not light up in a mode corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the hard hitting to the right promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a manner corresponding to the hard hitting to the right promotion effect.

In addition, according to the type of consecutive chan per special figure 2, the aspect of the large right hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the hit of the hit in the special figure 2 is a probability variable hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting the right side, and the speakers 8L, 8R to the promotion of hitting the right side. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. In addition, when the consecutive wins in the special figure 2 hits are normal jackpots, the frame lamps are not lit in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion performance, and the loudspeakers 8L and 8R correspond to the large right-handed promotion performance. You can choose not to output sound with . If the consecutive chan per special figure 2 is a hit, unlike the first hit per special figure 1, there is a special mode (for example, gold, seven colors, etc.) ), or a sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a special manner corresponding to the promotion effect of hitting to the right. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, a large right hitting promotion effect may be executed in a special mode (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit with the special figure 1. .

(About the third guide display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display related to the specific area, the image pointing to the V big prize opening during the jackpot round of the probability variable jackpot has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, display an image prompting the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the second start winning hole, or display a variable winning ball. Displaying an image prompting the player to fire a game ball aiming at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) may be applied. For example, after the ending effect is completed, the effect control CPU 120 sends from the CPU 103 a pending memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a symbol variation designation command (8D system command), a display result Based on the receipt of the specified command (8C system command) and the variation pattern specification command (81 system command), along with the arrow image pointing to the second start winning opening and the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), "Aim! ” may be displayed on the image display device 5 . Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and character images in the small right hitting promotion effect should be continuously displayed.

(Regarding the control of the time saving state by displaying the lost pattern)
In each characteristic part and modification described above, for the transition to the time saving state (high base state), the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 075F007A always operate via the big hit state and small hit state However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device You may make it transfer to a time saving state (high base state), without operating 075F007A.

In addition, as the time saving pattern described above, these time saving patterns may be part of the losing pattern or may be part of the small winning pattern.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a random number dedicated to the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the losing pattern or the big hit pattern. A lottery random number, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for judging a big win lottery, a lottery random number for a falling lottery, or the like may be used for the lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with symbols displayed as other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a losing symbol. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different probabilities between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Also, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing time-saving symbols, even if a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start opening (first start winning opening, 2nd starting prize opening) is acceptable.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a special random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the lottery of the time-saving design is a small hit design. When a random number is used, a specific small hit pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time saving area may be regarded as winning of the time saving pattern.

In addition, when the time-saving design lottery is performed using a structure, when the small winning design uses the time-saving design together, the variable display number of the time-saving state (time-saving number of times) does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area passes. to

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, when using random numbers for time-saving patterns, a specific losing pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when using a big hit pattern random number for lottery of time-saving patterns, it is specified. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Further, the judgment timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be executed at the timing after the big hit judgment. In addition, the time-saving design lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. Moreover, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Moreover, when the number of times of shortening of working hours differs according to the shortening of working hours pattern, it is possible to change the sorting lottery of the shortening of working hours pattern between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, a derivation lottery for time saving end patterns (time saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end patterns are derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the jackpot patterns are derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small win pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small win is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small win operation.

Further, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing of control to the time-saving state is the timing of the end of the operation of the structure in the game state (for example, small win state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a game machine controlled to a high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit (so-called specified number-of-times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high-probability low-base state when the amusement hall opens. , and after the high-probability low-base state is executed a specified number of times of variable display and ends, control may be performed to the time-saving state.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

In the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F, in order to control the game state to the time saving state, it was always via the jackpot game state, so to encourage the player to hit right in the time saving state. It is possible to perform the large right hitting promotion performance and the small right hitting promotion performance during the fanfare performance executed when the big hit occurs. However, if the above-described losing pattern is used as a time saving pattern, the game state is controlled to a time saving state without going through the big hit game state. In the period from when the pattern is displayed to when it is controlled to the time saving state, it is necessary to secure time for executing the large right hitting promotion performance and the small right hitting promotion performance. Therefore, the large right hitting promotion effect and the small right hitting promotion effect may be executed by the method described below.

For example, if the pattern confirmation time until the fluctuation of the losing pattern that is not the time saving pattern stops is set to 0.5 seconds, the pattern fixing time until the losing pattern that is the time saving pattern stops is set to 30 seconds longer than that. , You may perform the time-saving fanfare production which alert|reports the start of control of a time-saving state in the meantime. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C series command), the CPU 103 is different from the display result specification command indicating normal loss variation without time saving as a command for specifying loss, and time saving is given. A display result specifying command indicating is prepared, and depending on whether or not the time saving pattern is a loss variation, both commands may be used properly and an effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol determination time to 0.5 seconds when a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation is received, and the symbol determination time when a display result designation command indicating a time-saving loss variation is received. should be set to 30 seconds.

The effect control CPU 120 displays a name image indicating the name of the time saving state (for example, "time saving RUSH") on the image display device 5 in 30 seconds of the design confirmation time, and controls the time saving state from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output in a corresponding mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a mode corresponding to the control of the time saving state. Such a part of the time-saving fanfare effect can correspond to a part of the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 10-24(c2).

Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1), before the name image (“time saving RUSH”) by this time saving fanfare production is displayed, an image that congratulates the time saving state (for example, “O Happy!” character image) is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the time saving state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and lighting congratulates the time saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed so as to change the mode. In addition, as a small right hitting promotion effect, a small right hitting promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (an arrow indicating the right direction) and characters (characters of "right hitting") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5, A right-handed hitting sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 may be changed to a mode (lighting) that prompts right-handed hitting. It should be noted that the image in the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 start and end at the same timing. That is, both are designed to encourage the player to hit right over the same period of time.

After that, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2), while the name image (“time saving RUSH”) by the time saving fanfare production is displayed, the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously executed, and then FIG. 10-25 (c3) Once the game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the same manner as in the example shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. You may perform a performance. During this time, the small right hitting promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right hitting promotion effect, the game state may be controlled to the time saving state similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 10-48 to 10-50, and the small right hitting promotion effect may be continued.

In this way, even if it is controlled to the time saving state triggered by the lost pattern, by securing more pattern confirmation time than the pattern confirmation time in the lost pattern that is not the time saving pattern, the design confirmation time is large. A hitting promotion effect and a small right hitting promotion effect can be executed.

In addition, in the case of being controlled to the time saving state triggered by the lost pattern, as described above, not only those that execute the large right hitting promotion effect and the small right hitting promotion effect using the pattern fixed time as described above, but the loss of the time saving grant If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the loss for performing the next game (fluctuation) of the game whose pattern has been confirmed, in the next game (fluctuation), a short fanfare production is executed and a large right hitting promotion production and a small right A hitting promotion effect may be executed. Specifically, if the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing pattern has been confirmed is a losing variation, instead of performing a production that makes you expect a hit such as a reach production or a notice production, a time-saving fanfare production will be performed instead. Along with execution, a large right hitting promotion effect and a small right hitting promotion effect may be executed. However, if the next game (fluctuation) after the game in which the losing pattern is determined is a big hit, then the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) is executed, so the time saving fanfare effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory for performing the next game (variation) after the game in which the lost pattern of the time saving grant is confirmed, the time saving fanfare production is executed with the pattern not changed, and the large right hitting promotion production and small A right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, the CPU 103 does not transmit the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in order to prevent the performance of the customer waiting demonstration from being executed and the time saving fanfare performance to be hindered. . Alternatively, even if a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a time saving fanfare effect without executing the customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. A game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a special state (for example, a time-saving state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state)) that is easily controlled to the advantageous state,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
Continuing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed,
moreover,
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 12-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). For example, update means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIGS. 12-13) that can be updated to "1" or "2");
Adjusting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13 and FIG. 2, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, thereby prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game;
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. A portion that can determine whether to execute a notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed), and a game machine.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an adjustment is made to reduce the speed at which the game value is awarded. It is possible to prevent the gambling nature from being excessively increased due to the fact that the predetermined numerical data is the second value or not, so that the performance control can be executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

That is, in a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the instruction to shoot the game ball in the predetermined direction is emphasized by the first guide display and the second guide display, and after that, the first guide display is displayed. By taking over the second guide display without taking over and instructing to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction, the instruction is not overemphasized so as not to make the player feel annoyed, and the second guide display is performed first. to discreetly instruct the game ball to be shot in a predetermined direction from now on, then recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after recognizing it, firmly instruct the game ball to be shot in the predetermined direction by the first guidance display. In addition, when an adjustment to reduce the game value imparting speed (for example, adjustment to make the variable display time longer than the case where the game value imparting speed is not reduced in the variation pattern selection) is executed Since an effect is performed in accordance with the adjustment, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game while preventing an excessive game value from being awarded in a short period of time. In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine which, when installed in a game arcade, easily attracts the player's interest with an appropriate gambling property, and an easy-to-understand instruction of the direction in which the game ball should be shot in an advantageous state.

Also, the guidance display may be associated with the adjustment means. For example, the display mode of the guidance display may be changed depending on whether or not the application speed is lowered by the adjusting means. In this case, it is preferable to make the speed recognizable by changing the color of the guide display or changing the size of the display.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine that can preferably execute an instruction to prompt a player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction and that can improve the interest of the player, there is an advantage that is advantageous to the player. State (for example, jackpot game state) can be controlled, and a special state (for example, time-saving state (high-probability base state or low-probability base state) that is easier to control to the advantageous state than the normal state and the normal state) ) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 12-2) Production control means (for example, production control CPU120) capable of controlling production based on,
The number of times the advantageous state occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a continuous state period) during which the normal state was never controlled to the normal state after being controlled from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the special state When the specified number of times is reached (for example, when the number of consecutive residences is "5" or more, which is the first judgment number), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example, "0"). For example, update means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIGS. 12-13) that can be updated to "1" or "2");
Adjusting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13 and FIG. 2, the CPU 103 sets the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process, thereby prolonging the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game;
with
The game control means can transmit control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 Step 162 After executing the transmission setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162 SGS17, the portion for executing the command control processing shown in FIG.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 In addition, in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and variably displays using the notice effect type determination table according to the identified ball output state. A portion that can determine whether to execute a notice effect and the effect type of the notice effect to be executed), and a game machine. The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 109S, a movable unit 109SG400 is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. .

The movable unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410 as shown in FIG. 11-3(A). The first movable body 109SG401 is located at the center of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction, the second movable body 109SG402L is located at the left of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction, and the right part of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction. , the third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

The movable body unit 109SG400 includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third moving body unit 109SG400. and a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. Therefore, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in the characteristic portion 109SG can operate independently of the first movable body 109SG401. Also, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Among the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is driven by the first movable body motor 109SG421 to move to the retracted position, which is the lower position of the image display device 5. (See FIG. 11-3(A)), the suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 11-3(B)), the effect above the suggested position and also the front position of the image display device 5 It is movable to the position (see FIG. 11-3(C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are driven by the second movable body motor 109SG422 and the third movable body motor 109SG423 to move to the retracted position below the image display device 5 (FIG. 11). -3 (A)) to the left and right proximity positions (see FIG. 11-3 (C)) of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-3(A) to 11-3(C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all at the retracted position. The position state is the first state of the movable body unit 109SG400, and the first movable body 109SG401 is positioned at the suggested position, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are positioned at the retracted position. The state is the second state of the movable body unit 109SG400, the first movable body 109SG401 is positioned at the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are positioned at the production position. The state in which the movable body unit 109SG400 is located at the right and left close positions is defined as the third state.

FIG. 11-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature part 109SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is an effect control command for specifying variable display results such as special symbols and decoration symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big win type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big win type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative design in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change The fourth game state designation command corresponds to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also called a "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game or a small win game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the large winning opening to notify that the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a pattern designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation or non-probability variation), and whether it will be a small hit. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 11-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count that a notification command of passage, probability variation control, and time saving control are performed is performed.

FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-5, in this characteristic portion 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine the , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose the normal pattern". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 11-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In the present characteristic unit 109SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 109SG), the probability that the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 11-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 109SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 109SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 11-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 109SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot gaming state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 109SG will be described with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" that are executed and shift to a high-probability high base state, and high-probability low base state in which high-probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time-saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The big win game state by the "probability variable big win A" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal opening big-hit in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). . In addition, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" and the "non-probability variable big win" is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is set to 0.1 second. It's becoming In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable probability big win, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. , a so-called continuous state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 109SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C" depends on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure. Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value of the predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special figure is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 11-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 109SG. In this characteristic portion 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in the present characteristic portion 109SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 109SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 11-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 109SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 109SG, as described later, the type of the variation pattern is determined first, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 109SG. In this characteristic unit 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 big hit).

In addition, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is PB1-1 (normal reach big hit variation pattern) and PB1 using the big hit variation pattern determination table A. -2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot) Determine from

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B, while the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 is the same, PB1-2, PB1 -3, PB1-4, and PB1-5 are assigned different numbers of determination values. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 2 in PB1-1, 45 in PB1-2, 150 in PB1-3, 300 in PB1-4, and 500 in PB1-5 values are assigned to each. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, there are two determination values for PB1-1, 30 for PB1-2, 135 for PB1-3, 315 for PB1-4, and 515 for PB1-5. assigned to each. That is, in the characteristic portion 109SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the variation patterns are the super reach β1 and β2 variation patterns PB1-4 at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-variability jackpot. Alternatively, since PB1-5 is determined, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do. That is, in this characteristic portion 109SG, since the variable display is performed in the same variation pattern when the variable display result is the probability variable big hit C and when the variable display result is the small win, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 fluctuation pattern) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach out of time), PA2-1 (variation pattern out of normal reach), PA2-2 (variation pattern out of super reach α1), PA2-3 (variation pattern out of super reach α2) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β1) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β2).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 109SG is "missing", the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the fact that it is in a time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) increase the rate of variable display execution. , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 to 11-35, the variable display of super reach α1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-2, PB1-2) in this characteristic portion 109SG is a special figure variable display time of 40 It is a variable display for executing a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. The variable display of super reach α2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character B as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes The variable display of super reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes The variable display of super reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-9, as the jackpot expectations of each variable display in this characteristic portion 109SG, the jackpot expectations of super reach β2 are set to be the highest, and thereafter, super reach β1 and super reach α2. , Super Reach α1, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach are set in order of high expectations for big hits (Expectations for big hits in each variable display in this characteristic portion 109SG: Super Reach β2>Super Reach β1>Super Reach α2>Super Reach α1 > normal reach > non-reach).

In other words, focusing on the variable display of super reach, this characteristic portion 109SG determines whether the friend character displayed as a battle effect (reach effect of super reach) is friend character A or friend character B. The degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the combination of which of the enemy character A and B the enemy character displayed as the ready-to-win effect is.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 109SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIGS. is provided. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 11-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 109SG153, a game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 109SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 109SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) occurs, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 109SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 109SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 109SG151C is associated with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, and the general pattern display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 109SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 11-11(A) includes the production control flag setting unit 109SG191, the production control timer setting unit 109SG192, the production control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the production control buffer setting unit 109SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 109SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Furthermore, in the start-winning reception command buffer 109SG194A of the characteristic unit 109SG, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending storage display is set is set to the first special figure pending storage and the second special A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the figure reserved storage.

If execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display pattern of the reserved memory display is stored in the reserved display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, When the execution of the reading notice effect is determined, a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U. , and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning (the entry with the youngest buffer number). go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 11-11(B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 109SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described based on FIGS. 11-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 109SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 109SG154, it should be able to identify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 109SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "1" ( step 109 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 109 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 109SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "2" ( step 109 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data representing the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step 109 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 109SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 109SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 109SGS111, a winning random number value determination processing is executed (step 109SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 109SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the processing of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 109 SGS112 of FIG. 11-12 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 109SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIGS. result) is regarded as "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 5, FIGS. 11-12), which will be described later, determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 109 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of the machine 1 (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is the time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 109SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 11-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted at step 109SGS109 in FIG. 11-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 109 SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step 109SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 2 is selected and set (step 109 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 109SGS109 in FIG. 11-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 109 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 109SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 109SGS127), and proceed to step 109SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 109 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 109SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 109 SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the characteristic unit 109SG includes a deviation variation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of retained memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach out of the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. .

Therefore, in step 109SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

Further, when it is determined in step 109SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-13(A) , based on the random number value MR2 for judging the type of the big hit, the type of the big hit is determined (step 109 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

In addition, the symbol designation command corresponding to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the probability variation jackpot B, and the probability variation jackpot C in the case of the probability variation jackpot C Executes the transmission setting of the fourth symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the fifth symbol designation command (step 109 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (Step 109 SGS 134a). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), select and set a jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 109SGS135), and step Go to 109SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 109SGS136), and proceed to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processing of step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination data, a variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 109SGS138). In this characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that becomes a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a variation category based on the random number MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 109SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 109SGS132), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. 11-14 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 11-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 109 SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 109 SGS222).

If the received command is not the first start winning designation command at step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting winning designation command (step 109SGS224).

At step 109SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

If the received command in step 109SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226 If the received command is a pattern designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), then in step 109SGS228 the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (109SGS228; Y), if the received command is the second pending storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; Y), the received command is stored in the empty space in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. Store it at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and return to the processing of step 109SGS221.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning.

In step 109SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In particular, in the processing of this characterizing portion 162SGS234, when the received command is the first ball output state designation command, it is determined that the ball output state is the low ball output state, and the value of the performance ball output state flag is set to "0". is set (updated) to , and if the received command is the second ball output state designation command, the ball output state is determined to be the first high ball output state, and the value of the performance ball output state flag is set to "1". is set (updated) to , and if the received command is the third ball output state designation command, it is determined that the ball output state is the second high ball output state, and the value of the performance ball output state flag is set to "2". set (update) to

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 109SG, if the received command is any of the starting entrance winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending memory number notification command, the received command is Although the form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the empty area of the received command buffer 109SG194A was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the received command is the first start winning prize designation command, the pending storage number notification command If a pending memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry pending memory that has not received the pending memory number notification command It may be set outside the target of the reading notice effect.

FIGS. 11-15 are flowcharts showing an example of processing executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-15, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and there is no pending memory (entry) in which the pending display flag is not set. It is determined whether or not there is (step 109 SGS242a). If there is no pending memory with no pending display flag set (step 109SGS242a; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is pending storage with no pending display flag set (step 109SGS242a; Y), Furthermore, it is determined whether or not a super reach performance is being executed (step 109 SGS242b).

Whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super reach is being executed depends on whether the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether or not the variable display is being executed) and the value of the effect control process flag. is 2, it is sufficient to refer to the contents of the process data of the variable display being executed and determine whether or not the ready-to-reach effect of super-reach is being executed.

If the reach effect of super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and if the reach effect of super reach is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (the pending display flag is It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the entry not set is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109 SGS243a). If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, where the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a win or a big hit. If it is a design designation command (step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether or not the design designation command stored in the entry is the first design designation command (design designation command indicating loss) (step 109SGS243b). .

If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a big hit (step 109 SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol specifying command of the entry (step 109 SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the prediction effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, prefetching at the time of the jackpot (not shown) By referring to the notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the read advance notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the read advance notice effect (step 109 SGS245).

In step 109 SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (forecast type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 11-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 11-16, depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 109 SGS244, the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied.

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display. It is displayed in area 109SG005U.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set too high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "variable variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be enhanced.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is always determined to display the pending memory display in a white square (◇) or in a display pattern α or a white star. Although one of the display patterns β displayed in the shape (☆) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable Similar to the case where the display result is "missing", a case may be provided in which it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect.

Further, in step 109SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is ON is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a failure (step 109SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry whose flag is ON is specified (step 109 SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, specify that it is a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is specified and C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation pattern including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading announcement effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the variation pattern specified in step 109SGS247 (not shown) Whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined by referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table (step 109 SGS248).

In step 109 SGS248, for example, the presence or absence of the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (the notice type) are determined at the determined ratio as shown in FIG. 11-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 11-16, depending on the category of the variation pattern specified in the process of step 109 SGS247, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are changed. there is

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (notice type). Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is a white square (◇), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area. 109SG005U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005D. It is displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U. Incidentally, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U in a round shape (○) which is the normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-16, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "not The rate at which the pre-reading forewarning effect is executed (the rate determined for other than "no forewarning effect") is set higher than in the case of "ready to reach". In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", it is more likely than the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "others". The rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed (the rate at which other than "no notice effect" is determined) is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", if the fluctuation category is "other", than if the fluctuation pattern category is "non-reach" Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the percentage of display pattern α determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "others". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach" when the category of the variation pattern is "others". The percentage of display pattern β determined is set higher than in the case, and when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other" The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach" is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no notice effect), the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α Alternatively, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any variation pattern category when the variable display result is "mismatch".

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "loss (non-reach)", "loss (super reach)", or "loss (other)", the display pattern α is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot (probability variable jackpot)", when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than

With such settings, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable big hit". Since the ratio of the number of times when the number of times is increased increases, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

After executing step 109SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 109SGS247, that is, the display pattern (preview type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (Step 109SGS249).

After execution of step 109 SGS245 or when execution of pre-reading advance notice effect is determined (step 109 SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 109 SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Further, in step 109SGS249, if the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is not determined (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 109SGS250), go to step 109SGS252.

Also, as described above, during execution of the reach effect of super reach (step 109SGS242b; Y), or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a), the entry of the entry After setting the pending display flag to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the receive command buffer 109SG194A at the time of start winning is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag. be. In addition, even when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, according to the storage contents of the starting winning command buffer 109SG194A after the shift, the display shown in FIG. As shown, the reserved display of the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-17, if the number of first special figure pending storage is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As for the display form of this reserved memory display, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display form of "O" as shown in FIGS. 11-17. , When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", the display mode of "☆" is displayed. In addition, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is two, two pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D. Also, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is three, three pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D. Also, if the number of first special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D.

In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. displayed in the form. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is two, for example, as shown in FIGS. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U is displayed in the display mode where the reserved memory display of 1 is "○" and the reserved memory display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of "☆". Is displayed. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage display is displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, in accordance with the decrease (consumption) of the reserved memory, the reserved memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (screen center).

In other words, if the pending memory of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is shifted by consuming the pending memory in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, the variable display starting time after the shift is shifted. Based on the pending memory of the received command buffer 109SG194A, the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. , the display pattern of the reserved memory is determined and set to the reserved display flag, and the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005D are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set to the reserved display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U.

In addition, in this characterizing section 109SG, the form of executing the processing of step 109SGS252 in the pre-reading notice setting processing is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D And the process for updating the pending display of the second pending storage display area 109SG005U may be executed separately as a process (for example, pending display update process) different from the pre-reading notice setting process.

Further, in step 109SG242, the characterizing section 109SG determines execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the starting winning on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. New storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 109SGS242 due to the simultaneous occurrence of the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening If it is determined that there is, that is, if the entry whose display undecided flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage, both entries are pre-read notice It is a target for determining whether to execute the performance or not. Both the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the first special plan is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special plan are newly stored are stored depending on whether the pre-reading notice effect is executed or not. In the case of a determination target, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pending display of the pending storage of the first special symbol and the pending display of the second special symbol There is a case where the pre-reading forewarning effects are simultaneously executed in both displays.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 109SG, as described above, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is Both the newly stored reserved memory and the newly stored reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect, but this invention is this In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan Only one of them may be determined to execute.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special symbol is suspended in the second special symbol. Priority is given to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading foretelling effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan is unambiguously determined to be non-execution, and the first special plan When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution and non-execution of pre-reading notice effect in pending storage in the second special figure is determined with priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice performance in the reserved storage in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan, it is unambiguously decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, and the second special plan When it is determined not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

11-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 109 SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number It is shifted upward by minutes (step 109 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

And, in step 109SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109 SGS282).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 109SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 109SGS284). Also, the first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and every time the first time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 stores image data during variable display, including image data indicating the display state of left, middle, and right decorative patterns, in the VRAM. The write/display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. As a result, the variable display of decorative patterns and the display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIGS. 11-20).

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (step 109 SGS287). If the variable display variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; Y), the movable body control timer is set to the second time (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 operates the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 each time the first time elapses. control. Thereby, movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIGS. 11-20).

After step 109SGS288 is executed, or if the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; N), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 109 SGS286).

FIG. 11-19 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). If the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is decremented by 1 (step 109SGS303c).

After step 109SGS303c is executed, or if it is not super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; N), the process proceeds to step 109SGS306.

At step 109 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 109 SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 109 SGS308). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance component) is executed (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

If the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether or not the movable body control timer has timed out (109SGS309g). If the movable body control timer has timed out (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set in the movable body control timer again), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

If the variable display is not super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; N) and if the movable body control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS309g; N), the processing of steps 109SGS309h and 109SGS309i is executed. without proceeding to step 109 SGS310.

Next, it is checked whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen (33 ms The image data of the screen to be displayed after the elapse of time is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 109 SGS311). In this manner, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of decorative patterns and display control of other images (display control of moving images). The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, the variable display control timer is reset to the first time (step 109 SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out (step 109SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 109 SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination designation command is received is in the ON state (step 109 SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the fluctuation. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n expires in the process of step 109 SGS306, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of decorative patterns based on the process table is performed. ends.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device during the reach effect of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 in the characteristic portion 109SG will be described. Rendering modes of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, for the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach α2, when the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2 are started, the first enlarged display period is started. , Character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period If there is, ally character A and enemy character B) are enlarged and displayed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the normal display magnification (1 time) to the display magnification m1, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The character image is enlarged at a constant speed up to the magnification m2, and in the third enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3 at a constant speed. After the end of the third enlarged display period, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period has passed. .

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all of the same length. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, among the differences between the display magnifications, the difference between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1 is the largest, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3 is the largest. is the smallest. That is, in this characteristic portion 109SG, the character image enlargement speed is set to be the fastest during the first enlargement display period and the slowest during the third enlargement display period (character image enlargement speed: first enlarged display period>second enlarged display period>third enlarged display period). In addition, in the characterizing portion 109SG, “fast enlargement speed” means that the image enlargement rate per unit time is high.

Thereafter, in this characteristic portion 109SG, a period T2 is a period (a period during which the movable body action suggestive effect is executed) combining the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period described above, and the third enlarged display period and the character image are displayed. A period including the predetermined period during which the display magnification is maintained at m3 may be referred to as a period T3.

As shown in FIG. 11-21, during the reach performance of super reach α1 and super reach α2, if the result of the variable display is a big hit, the As an effect to notify that the variable display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving to the close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved. A movable body motion effect A is executed to move the movable body unit 109SG400 to the retracted position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-22, during the reach effect of super reach α1 and super reach α2, if the variable display result is wrong, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure.

Henceforth, in this characterizing part 109SG, the period during which the movable body effect A and the deviation notification effect are executed may be referred to as a period T4. Among these periods T2 to T4, the period T3 is the shortest period and the period T4 is the longest period (the length of the periods T2 to T4: period T4>period T2>period T3).

In addition, during the ready-to-reach performances of super reach α1 and super reach α2, effect images are also displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion performance A (only when the variable display result is a big hit). .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body A movable body motion suggesting production A is executed in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward 109SG401 at a speed V1.

Furthermore, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 over a period T4 as part of the above-described movable body motion presentation A. It moves (diffuses) toward the edge of the display device 5 . Note that the absolute value of the speed V2 is greater than the absolute value of the speed V1. In other words, the movable body action effect A in the characterizing part 109SG is also an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves faster than the movable body action suggestive effect A.

Further, during the reach performance of super reach α1 and super reach α2, light emission of the movable body LED 109SG495 is also executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, the movable body LED 109SG495 is in the middle of the above-described period T2 (the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period) and period T3 (more precisely is the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period), the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1. Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light with a luminance C2 higher than the luminance C1 over a period T4.

In addition, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, four types of performance sounds can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R: BGM such as music, SE (sound effect), action suggestive sound, and big hit notification sound. , and the type of sound output differs depending on the time during the reach production.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, the BGM is the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R only during the period T3. output is stopped. That is, the output of BGM in the ready-to-win effect is executed over the period T4 from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the end timing of the period T2.

Also, SE (sound effect) is a dramatic sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, like BGM, but unlike BGM, there is no period during which output from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. . In other words, the SE output in the ready-to-win effect is performed throughout the ready-to-win effect.

The motion suggestive sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion suggestive production A. That is, the action suggesting sound is output only during the period T2 during which the movable body action suggesting effect A is executed, and is not output during the other periods. The big hit notification sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion presentation A. In other words, the big hit notification sound is output only during the period T4 during which the movable body action effect A is executed when the variable display result is a big win, and is not output during the other periods.

As shown in FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24, regarding the variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2, when the reach effects of super reach β1 and super reach β2 are started, the first enlarged display period and the second Character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (in the case of the reach effect of super reach β1, friendly character B and enemy character A; Enlarged display of ally character B and enemy character B) is executed.

Fig. 11- for the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2, the lighting mode of the movable body LED 109SG495, the output of BGM, SE, action suggestive sound, and jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. 21 and FIGS. 11-22, the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2 is the same as the variable display, so the explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-23, during the reach effect of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable As an effect informing that the display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the close position of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to their retracted positions. A movable body action effect B to move (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-24, during the ready-to-reach effect of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is wrong, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure. The movable object effect B is an effect that is executed over the period T4, like the movable object effect A and the failure notification effect described above.

Also, during the reach effects of super reach β1 and super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. A movable body motion suggesting effect B is executed in which the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved (reciprocated) between the retracted position and the suggested position. Note that the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position in the movable body motion suggesting effect B is shorter than the aforementioned period T3 ( Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4>period T2>period T3>period T1).

As described above, in variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. While the action suggesting effect is executed, the movable body action suggesting effect is not executed during the third enlarged display period. Among the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is the fastest in the first enlarged display period (the image enlargement ratio per unit time is large), and the character image enlargement rate is the highest in the first enlarged display period. During the enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is set to be the slowest (image enlargement rate per unit time is small).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-26(A), when the movable body motion suggesting effect A and the movable body motion suggesting effect B are compared, the movable body motion suggesting effect A is a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. 109SG005S repeatedly acts on the first movable body 109SG401 (a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself. does not move, whereas the movable body motion suggesting effect B is different in that the first movable body 109SG401 repeatedly moves between the retracted position and the suggestive position. On the other hand, both the movable body motion suggesting effect A and the movable body motion suggesting effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1 during the execution period of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-26(B), comparing the movable body action effect A and the movable body action effect B, the movable body action effect A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retracted position to the effect position. , move the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R to the close position of the first movable body moved to the effect position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and This is an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S spreads from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2. In the movable body motion effect B, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the effected position to the approach position of the first movable body. It is an effect of moving (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S diffusing from the first movable body 109SG401 at the speed V2 is not executed. This is different from the movable body motion presentation A. Further, both the movable body motion effect A and the movable body motion effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1 during the execution period of the effect.

Next, the display mode of the ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 in the variable display of super-to-win α1, super-to-win α2, super-to-win β1, and super-reach to β2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-27 to 11-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 (A) and 11-27 (B), after a while from the start of variable display of any one of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, , the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L and the "right" decorative design display area 5R are stopped in a combination indicating reach. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the state of reach, if the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A is started as a reach effect (FIG. 11-27 (C ) and FIG. 11-28(A)), if the variable display is the super reach α2 variable display, a battle effect between friendly character A and enemy character B is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 11-27(D) and 11-28(A)). FIG. 11-30 (A)), if the variable display is the super reach β1 variable display, a battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character A is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 11-27 (E) and 11 -32 (A)), if the variable display is a super reach β2 variable display, a battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character B is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 11-27 (F) and 11- 34(A)).

At the start of the ready-to-win performance of these super ready-to-win, the decorative symbols displayed in the “left” decorative design display area 5L and the “right” decorative design display area 5R are displayed at the upper left and right ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The decorative patterns displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" decorative patterns become temporarily invisible.

As shown in FIGS. 11-28 (A) and 11-28 (B), in the second half of the battle production, which is the reach production of super reach α1, as shown in FIG. Display of a moving image in which character A attacks enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 11-28(C) to 11-28(F), the friendly character A is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character A is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 11-28(D) to 11-28(F)), the images of friend character A and enemy character A are displayed first on image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figs. 11-28 (A) to 11-28 (C)), and overlaps the images of friendly character A and enemy character A with these low contrasts. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body action suggestive effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can see the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 and the first movable body 109SG401. It is easy to recognize the movement toward.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-28(E) to 11-28(F), when the third enlarged display period has passed, the friendly character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification of m3 for a predetermined period of time. to display. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 11-29(H) and 11-29(I), when the variable display result is a big hit, a friendly character A and an enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as a movable body motion effect A. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. An effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. be.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character A's attack hits enemy character A on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 11-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B), when the second half of the battle production (reach production) as the reach production of super reach α2 is approaching, it is shown in FIG. 11-30 (C). Thus, display of a moving image in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 11-30(C) to 11-30(F), the friendly character A is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character B is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the friend character A and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 11-30(D) to 11-30(F)), the images of friend character A and enemy character B are displayed first on image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figs. 11-30 (A) to 11-30 (C)), and overlaps the images of friendly character A and enemy character B with these low contrasts. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body action suggestive effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can see the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 and the first movable body 109SG401. It is easy to recognize the movement toward.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-30(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friend character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 11-31(G) to 11-31(I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the player character A and the enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. An effect image 109SG005B of an explosion is displayed overlapping the image of the character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. An effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. be.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character A's attack hits enemy character B on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 11-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 11-32 (A) and 11-32 (B), when the latter half of the battle production (reach production) is reached as a reach production of super reach β1, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (C) At this time, display of a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character A starts. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 11-32(C) to 11-32(F), the friendly character B is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character A is about to be attacked by a close-range attack, the images of the friend character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggesting effect B (movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state of 109SG400 and the change from the second state to the first state are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-32(D) and 11-32(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of friend character B and enemy character A, effect image 109SG005X is displayed on image display device 5, Enlarged display of the images of friend character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-32(F), when the third enlarged display period has passed, the friend character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 11-33(G) to 11-33(I), when the result of the variable display is a big win, the player character B and the enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the character A image.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character B's attack hits enemy character A on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 11-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 11-34 (A) and 11-34 (B), when the second half of the battle production (reach production) is reached as the reach production of super reach β2, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (C) At that time, display of a moving image in which ally character B attacks enemy character B starts. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 11-34(C) to 11-34(F), the friendly character B is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character B is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the friend character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggesting effect B (movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state of 109SG400 and the change from the second state to the first state are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-34(D) and 11-34(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of friend character B and enemy character A, effect image 109SG005X is displayed on image display device 5, Enlarged display of the images of friend character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-34(F), when the third enlarged display period has passed, the friend character B and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-35(G) to 11-35(I), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the player character B is displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. and an explosion effect image 109SG005B overlapping the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars moving from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. A model effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character B's attack hits enemy character B on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost).
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 11-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 109SG does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion production B, as shown in 10-31 to FIG. 11-35. On the other hand, during execution of the movable body motion effect B, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, so that the display of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion enlarges the image of the friend character and the enemy character during the reach effect. Since it is possible to make the display and the effect motion of the movable body motion effect B by the movable bodies (the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R) more conspicuous, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, since the enlargement speed of each character image differs between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, it is possible to improve the rendering effect during the enlarged display period. Since the motion speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the control load of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion presentation can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the enlargement speed is slower in the second enlargement display period than in the first enlargement display period, and the third enlargement display period is Since the enlargement speed is slower than that of the second enlargement display period, the enlargement display of the images of the ally character and the enemy character is continued even after the movable body motion suggesting effect is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in this characteristic portion 109SG, an example is given in which the enlargement speed is the fastest during the first enlargement display period and the enlargement speed is the slowest during the third enlargement display period, but the present invention is not limited to this. The enlargement speed may be the fastest in the third enlargement display period, the enlargement speed in the first enlargement display period may be the slowest, or the enlargement speed in the second enlargement display period may be the fastest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted during the ready-to-win effect including the enlarged display period. It is possible to prevent the attention of the In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted throughout the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period during which the execution of the effect is restricted may be only part of the ready-to-win effect (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). In addition, in the feature part 109SG, as a mode for limiting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, a form in which the pre-reading notice effect is not executed during the ready-to-win effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , during the ready-to-win effect, the pre-reading forewarning effect may be executed at a lower rate than other periods.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-34, the player can visually recognize the ready-to-win effect during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect B, but as shown in FIGS. 11-33 and 11-35 Furthermore, during execution of the movable body action effect B, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, thereby lowering the visibility of the ready-to-win effect. That is, since the visibility of the effect image of the reach effect (the image of the friend character and the enemy character) changes according to the action status of the first movable body 109SG401, the action of the first movable body 109SG401 is used as the action suggestive effect of the action of the movable body. It is possible to make it easy to understand whether it is an action or an action as a movable body action effect, and it is possible to adjust the degree of attention of the first movable body 109SG401 and the ready-to-win effect effect image.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-23, during execution of the movable body motion suggestive presentation, BGM, SE, and action suggestive sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the movable body motion presentation is executed. During the middle, BGM, SE, and the big hit notification sound are output from the speakers 8L, 8R, so before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable object motion effect, the output from the speakers 8L, 8R is performed. The player can easily recognize that the effect sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position. Since the period T3 is a period shorter than the period T2 during which the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed, the motion of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggesting effect is the same as the motion of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggesting effect. It is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood as , and increase the interest of the game by making the movable body motion suggestion performance execution period longer than the movable body motion performance execution period in the suggested ready-to-win performance. decline can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, by turning off the movable body LED 109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body motion effect or the deviation notification effect, the movable body LED 109SG495 is off, the player can easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-34, in the movable body motion suggestion effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. 11-33 and 11-35, the movable body In the action effect B, since all of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are operated, it is possible to determine whether the action of the movable body is a motion suggesting the action of the movable body or the effect of the action of the movable body. It is possible for the player to easily distinguish whether or not the action is also an action.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1, and the movable body motion presentation is performed. Since the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light with the luminance C2, which is higher than the luminance C1, the player can easily recognize that the movable body action presentation is being executed by the luminance of the movable body LED 109SG495. , the amusement of the game can also be improved during execution of the movable body motion presentation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-30, during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect A, the image display device 5 displays a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, and other ready-to-reach effects are displayed. Effect images (images of ally character A and enemy character A or enemy character B) are displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, during execution of movable body action suggestive effect A, effect image of reach effect. , the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S can be made conspicuous, and the movement of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S at the speed V1 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the motion of the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 and 11-31, when the movable body action effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S appear on the image display device 5 at a speed V2, which is higher than the speed V1. is displayed so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S can be made conspicuous in the movable body motion presentation A, and these Since the movement of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the motion of the first movable body 109SG401, thereby increasing the interest in the game. can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-28(F) and 11-30(F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5 before execution of the movable body motion effect A or the deviation notification effect. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the effect to be executed from now on is the movable body motion effect or the failure notification effect.

Although the characteristic portion 109SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. included.

For example, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 to 11-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same. , the start timing of the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 and the start timing of enlarged display of the effect image (image of the friend character and the enemy character) of the ready-to-win effect are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect is set to be earlier than the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggesting effect is performed. player's attention.

In the characteristic portion 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the enlarged display period is substantially the same as the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period (the display magnification is slightly different). only), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as modification 109SG-2, after the enlarged display period ends, a specific effect is displayed on the image display device 5. , an effect image, or the like may be displayed so that the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period is different. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended after the enlarged display period has ended.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the image display device 5 can display the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion according to the actions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during the reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 displays the The effect image may be displayed.

In this way, if the image display device 5 can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production, The size of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion may be different from that of the effect image according to the progress of the battle production. In this way, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the motion of the movable body and the battle performance during the ready-to-win performance, so that the game interest can be improved. .

Furthermore, when the image display device 5 can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production, the effect of the explosion corresponding to the movement of these movable bodies can be displayed. The image transparency of the image 109SG005B and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production may be varied. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle performance during the ready-to-win performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the period from the end of the movable body action suggestive effect and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body action effect or the failure notification effect, the friendly character and the enemy character are visually recognized on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-4, after the movable body motion suggesting effect and the enlarged display period are over, the movable body motion effect or failure notification is given. During the period until the start timing of the effect, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are set to the first low visibility state, which is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, thereby reducing the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character. You may let Furthermore, when executing the movable body action effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), by setting the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 from the first low visibility state to a second low visibility state, The visibility of the friend character and the enemy character may be further reduced. By doing so, after the end of the enlarged display period, the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended due to the decrease in the visibility of the friend character and the enemy character on the image display device 5. , during execution of the movable body presentation, it is possible to increase attention to the actions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R.

11-28 to 11-35, the characterizing portion 109SG displays the same effect image on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body motion effect. (the same ally character and enemy character) are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The image display device 5 may display different effect images. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestive effect is more than the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion effect. can be increased. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of variations of the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect, so that the amusement of the game during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect can be improved. .

11-28 to 11-35, the characterizing portion 109SG displays the same effect image on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body motion effect. (the same ally character and enemy character) are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, the movable body motion suggestion corresponding image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion effect is being executed. As the body action effect corresponding image, an image different from the movable body action suggestive effect corresponding image may be displayed.

Further, when the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect, the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect are set to can be different. By doing so, the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect effect are combined with the motions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R (execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect). or execution of movable body action presentation).

Further, when the image corresponding to the movable body action effect is displayed on the image display device 5, the visibility of the image corresponding to the movable body action effect may be reduced by reducing the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5. By doing so, when the movable body action effect is executed, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the movable body action effect instead of the image corresponding to the movable body action effect.

Further, when the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect, the image display device 5 outputs the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect from the speaker 8L8R. When the image corresponding to the movable body action effect is displayed in , the sound corresponding to the movable body action effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body action effect may be output from the speaker 8L8R. By doing so, it is possible to output sounds corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R when the movable body action suggestive presentation and the movable body action presentation are executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body motion suggesting presentation or the movable body motion presentation is being performed.

Furthermore, when the movable body motion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), the image display device 5 can be operated on the image display device 5 from a timing before the start of the movable body motion effect. Display of the image corresponding to the body action effect may be started. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the start of the movable body action presentation during the ready-to-win presentation of super ready-to-win, and to increase the player's attention to the movable body action presentation.

Further, in the characterizing portion 109SG, in the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 toward the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although the form in which the display that moves at the speed V1 is executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range It may be variable. In this case, for example, when the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is changed to the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggesting effect A. is changed to a lower speed (the speed V1 is changed to a lower speed) as it approaches . Note that the speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S during execution of the movable body motion presentation A may be set to a speed higher than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing so, when the movable body motion suggesting effect A is executed, the movement speed (speed V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, thereby improving the game interest. can.

In addition, the characterizing section 109SG outputs one action suggesting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to execution of the movable body motion suggesting presentation, and one loudspeaker notification from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of the movable body motion presentation. Although the mode of outputting sound has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the action-indicating sound and the jackpot notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. .

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to output a plurality of sounds as the operation suggestive sound and the big hit notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a plurality of output start timings of the operation suggestive sound and the big hit notification sound are provided, and the operation is performed at any timing. Different sounds may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the suggestive sound or the jackpot notification sound is started to be output. By doing so, the player can easily recognize that the movable body action suggestive effect or the movable body action effect is being executed by the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the sound can be output according to the output timing. Since the action-indicating sound and the big-hit notification sound are changed by pressing, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In particular, when the output timing of the action-indicative sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios depending on the result of the variable display. In this case, since the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the output of the action-indicating sound is started, the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, when the output timing of the jackpot notification sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be decided at different ratios according to the jackpot type and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 . In this case, since the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the output of the big-win notification sound is started, the amusement of the game can be improved.

11-21 to 11-24, the first movable body 109SG401 moves at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect. Although the form of reciprocating movement has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retracted position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at positions near the retracted position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401 from being out of step.

In addition, in the characterizing part 109SG, after the movable body motion suggesting effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is kept waiting at the retracted position until the movable body motion effect or the failure notification effect is started. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the movable body motion suggesting effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to wait at the suggesting position until the movable body motion effect or the deviation notification effect is started. good too. By doing so, when the movable body motion presentation is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the presentation position, so that the game interest can be improved. Furthermore, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggesting position after the movable body action suggestive effect is completed, the player's expectation for execution of the movable body action effect can be aroused.

11-21 to 11-24, in the characterizing part 109SG, the start-up speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is increased during execution of the movable body motion suggesting presentation and during execution of the movable body motion presentation. Although they are the same, the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

11-20, the characteristic unit 109SG controls the update of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) are executed based on the respective control timers, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body In addition to the movement control of , lighting control of LEDs provided in the pachinko game machine 1, output control of effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like may be executed based on respective dedicated control timers.

In this way, when executing the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, the movement control of the movable body, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, for example, the effect control The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (performs S73 to S77 of the effect control main processing shown in FIG. 8 every 1 ms), and performs update control of the effect image every 33 ms, movement control of the movable body every 1 ms, and LED lighting control is executed every 10 ms, and effect sound output control is executed every 1 ms. In particular, when the performance image update control, LED lighting control, and performance sound output control are executed, movement control of the movable body (first movable body motor 109SG421, second movable body motor 109SG422, third movable body motor 109SG422, drive control of the motor 109SG423) are executed together, movement control of the movable body, effect image update control, LED lighting control, and effect sound output control can be preferably executed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 109SG, the form in which the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is possible to change the ratio of control to the big win game state according to the mode in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect.

In addition, in the characterizing section 109SG, a form of displaying a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S on the image display device 5 was exemplified as the movable body motion suggesting effect A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestive effect A are provided, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed in one of the modes as the movable body motion suggestive effect A. Depending on the number, the ratio controlled to the big hit game state may be varied.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-25, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the third enlarged display period, the first movable body 109SG401 can be reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position (movable body motion suggestion presentation). Although a mode in which the execution is not performed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is performed even during the third enlarged display period. A case may be provided. In particular, when the variable display result is a big hit, the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 can be executed during the third enlarged display period, thereby enabling the third enlarged display. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 reciprocates between the retracted position and the suggested position during the display period, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 109SG, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestive effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retracted position and the suggested position. (Movable body motion suggestive effect B) to suggest the execution of movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific Execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B may be suggested in a mode other than the display of the image of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, when the first movable body 109SG401 is provided with an LED (movable body LED 109SG495) as shown in the characteristic portion 109SG, the lighting and blinking period of the LED, the lighting color, etc., can be used to produce a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion. Execution of production B may be suggested.

11-28 and 11-30, in the characterizing portion 109SG, the contrast between the images of the friend character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body action suggestion effect A. 11-28 (D) and 11-30 (D)), but the present invention is limited to this Instead, the movable body action suggestion effect A is performed at a timing before the image display device 5 reduces the contrast between the images of the friend character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B (for example, FIG. 11-28 (C) or the timing of FIG. 11-30(C)).

When the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is started before the contrast between the images of friend character A and enemy character A or enemy character B is lowered in the image display device 5 as described above, By increasing the transparency (transparency) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect image being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be made more visible than when the contrast is lowered.

11-29(G) and the like, in the characteristic portion 109SG, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body action presentation is executed, and is displayed on the image display device 5. Although a part of the effect image that is displayed is rendered invisible by the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect image 109SG005B of the explosion or an image dedicated to the movable body action effect may be displayed in the entire display area of the device 5, and all other effect images may be made invisible.

In addition, in the characterizing section 109SG, an example is shown in which the movable body motion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of executing the movable body motion effect is A timing other than during the reach performance of the super reach may be used. For example, as a modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (A), 11-36 (B) and FIGS. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the movable body action effect during the period from reaching the ready-to-win state to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-36(B), the movable body motion suggesting effect is first started after reaching the ready-to-win state, and the ready-to-win effect to be executed after this is highly expected (big hit). The ratio of being controlled to the game state is high) reach production (for example, reach production of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the characteristic part 109SG) and low expectation (jackpot game state ) reach effect (for example, the reach effect with a lower expectation than the reach effects of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the characteristic portion 109SG) As a branching effect for informing whether to branch to or not, the branching effect for displaying an image of a character with eyes closed is shown in FIG. The characters are gradually enlarged and displayed.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expectation ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIGS. The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without opening the eyes of the character. That is, in the branching effect, the characters displayed on the image display device 5 turn dark without opening their eyes, so that the high-expectation ready-to-win effect is not executed (the low-expectation ready-to-win effect is executed). be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branch effect is finished), the low-expectation ready-to-win effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a high-expectation ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIGS. It is reported that the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect will be executed by the character opening his/her eyes. In addition, at this time, a movable body motion presentation is also executed. After the movable body action effect and the branch effect are finished, the ready-to-reach effect with high expectation is executed.

In other words, the movable body action effect may be executed as an effect for notifying that the game state is controlled to a big hit as illustrated in the characteristic portion 109SG, but it notifies that the ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation is to be executed. You may perform as production|presentation (production|production which alert|reports that the expectation degree controlled by a jackpot game state is high).

In this modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 11-36(B) and 11-37(C), the image display device 5 gradually enlarges and displays the character whose eyes are closed as a branch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as concentration lines, the player may be made to pay attention to whether or not the character opens its eyes.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the ready-to-win production of super reach, an example of applying the present invention as a branch of whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit was illustrated, but in this modification 109SG-8 As shown, the present invention may be applied as a branch as to which of the ready-to-win effect with a low expectation and the ready-to-win effect with a high expectation is executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention is the image of the character (the first specific image is the image of the character with its eyes closed, and the second specific image is the image of the character with its eyes open), and the effect image in the present invention. corresponds to the image such as the above-described saturated lines.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 and 11-37, in the present modification 109SG-8, when the movable body motion effect is executed as a effect for notifying that the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect is executed, Although a mode in which the movable body action suggesting effect is executed before the movable body action effect is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body action suggesting effect may not be executed. Further, the execution ratio of the movable body motion presentation may be different between when the movable body motion suggestive presentation is executed and when it is not performed (the rate at which the ready-to-win performance with high expectation is executed is different). (Description of Characteristic Portion 162SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 162SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 162SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic portion 162SG has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic configuration described above, and the same configuration denoted by the same reference numeral as the basic configuration is described here. Description will be omitted, and the characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the characteristic portion 162SG different from the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

FIG. 12-1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic portion 162SG. As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 12-1, in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic part 162SG, the predetermined A variable display time extension (to be described later) for adjusting the number of game balls to be paid out (given to the player) in a unit period in response to determination as being in a high-ball state at the lower left position of the game area, which is a position. A high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 for notifying by lighting that adjustment or jackpot period extension adjustment is being executed is provided so as to be visible to the player.

These high ball state notification LEDs 162SG071 are connected to the main board 11 like the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20, and the main substrate 11 (game control microcomputer 100) executes a ball output state determination process (see FIGS. 12-13), which will be described later, to control lighting/extinguishing. The control cycle of the display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 is the same cycle.

Thus, in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic part 162SG, the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed by determining the high ball output state by lighting the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071. can be confirmed (understood).

FIG. 12-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature part 162SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 12-2(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is an effect control command for specifying variable display results such as special symbols and decoration symbols. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also called variable display result) is a "loss" or a "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change The fourth game state designation command corresponds to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command 96XXH is a payout state designation command for designating the determination status of the payout state determination in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. As shown in FIG. 12-2(C), different EXT data are set in the payout state designation command according to the judgment status of the payout state judgment. As a specific example, the command 9600H is set as a ball output state 1 designation command corresponding to a low ball output state that is not determined as a high ball output state, and the command 9601H is set so that the number of consecutive jackpots is the first determination number (5 times) and less than the second determination count (10 times). A command for designating the ball output state 3 corresponding to the determination state determined as the second high ball output state, which is the number of times of 2 determination (10 times) or more, is used.

The command 97XXH is a command for notifying the post-judgment consecutive game count, which is the number of times the jackpot state occurred in the high-ball game state determined after being judged as the high-ball game state, and corresponds to the post-determination consecutive game count. By setting the EXT data, the number of consecutive games after determination is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command 98XXH is a command for notifying the post-judgment variable display remaining number of times (including the number of variable displays after the end of the high base state) executed after being judged as the high ball state. By setting the EXT data corresponding to the number of display remaining times, the post-determination variable display remaining number of times is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation, non-probability variation, or sudden probability) and whether it will be a small hit. is. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 12-2(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count that a notification command of passage, probability variation control, and time saving control are performed is performed.

FIG. 12-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 12-3, in this characteristic portion 162SG, on the main board 11 side, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose the normal pattern". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 12-4(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this characteristic part 162SG, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is referred to for determining based on the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result. table.

In the display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 162SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), a special figure A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss".

In the display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is data for judgment assigned to. In the display result determination table 1 in the present characteristic portion 162SG, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "jackpot ” is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 162SG001, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 162SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 162SG). /30). That is, in the display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or the time-saving state. is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that

FIG. 12-4(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. The display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small winning" is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 162SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), special figures A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "small win".

In the display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the display result determination table 2 in the characteristic portion 162SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the case of the first special figure game and the second special figure game. Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 12-5(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 162SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 Special symbol game by special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is “non-probability variable jackpot”, “probability variable jackpot A”, “ It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variable jackpot B" and "probability variable jackpot C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in this characterizing portion 162SG with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and high probability low base state in which high probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, the "variable probability big hit A" may be called a 10 round (10R) variable probability big hit, and the "variable probability big hit B" may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit. Furthermore, in the big-hit game based on the "probability-variable big-hit C", two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning-ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated, and a special It is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 seconds). In addition, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, the variable probability control and the time saving control are not executed.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 162SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic portion 162SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

In other words, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when it is determined to be "variable probability big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 12-6) In addition, as a result of the variable display, the chance number is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same. , It is impossible to distinguish whether it is a ``variable probability big win C'' in which the variable probability control is executed or a ``minor win'' in which the previous game state is continued without executing the variable probability control, so the variable probability big win C cannot be distinguished. After the end of the big win game or the small win game, the game can be continued while making the player expect that the variable probability control is executed.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the variable probability big win A and the variable probability big win B are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 162SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In addition, the jackpot that occurred in the low base state may be described as the first jackpot (first hit), and the jackpot that occurred in the time-saving state (high probability high base state and low probability high base state) It may be described as "Shoatari". In addition, the period of the big hit state and the high base state from when the first big hit (first hit) occurs to when it is controlled to the normal state after that is also called a continuous period (advantageous period). In this characteristic part 162SG, even if the variable probability big hit C occurs, it is not controlled to a high base after the big win, so the variable probability big win C is not regarded as the first big win (first hit), and the big hit is made in the variable probability state after the variable probability big win C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variable jackpot C is regarded as the first jackpot (first hit). The subsequent period of the high-probability-low base state may also be included in the consecutive period (advantageous period).

In addition, although not implemented in this characteristic portion 162SG, instead of the variable probability big hit C, a sudden time-saving big hit that makes the game state after the big hit a low probability high base state may be provided. Suddenly, the short-time jackpot becomes the first jackpot (first hit).

Further, for example, when a time-saving pattern (for example, a stop pattern of 137 or a stop pattern dedicated to time-saving not displayed in variable display) is derived and displayed as a stop pattern, a round game is executed to open the special variable winning ball device 7. In the case of direct control from the normal state to the high base state in this way, the start of the high base state is the timing of the start of the consecutive period (advantageous period). becomes.

In other words, the consecutive period (advantageous period) is the period from when the normal state is controlled to either the jackpot state (advantageous state) or the high base state (special state) until the time when it is controlled to the normal state after that. is.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C" depends on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure. Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 12-6 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 162SG. In this characteristic portion 162SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present characteristic portion 162SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, . may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 162SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 12-6, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 162SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present characteristic unit 162SG, as will be described later, the type of the variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 162SG. In this characterizing section 162SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-7, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot) and PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach jackpot). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 12-7, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B differ in the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 498 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 747 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. That is, in the present characteristic portion 162SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot PB1. Since it is determined to be -2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). That is, in the characteristic portion 162SG, since the variable display is performed in the same variation pattern when the variable display result is the probability variable big win C and when the variable display result is the small win, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern) and PA2-2 (super reach fluctuation pattern) using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss do.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, select the variation pattern determination table C for loss, and the loss Use the fluctuation pattern determination table C to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach out) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach out) do.

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 Determined from (shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 162SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) increase the rate of variable display execution. , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

Next, the relationship between the variation pattern and the ball output state will be described with reference to FIG. 12-8. The ball output state flag in FIG. 12-8 is a flag updated by the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. A flag which is set to "1" in the case of the high-ball output state and "2" in the case of the second high-ball-output state. It is possible to specify whether the state is a low-ball-out state, a first high-ball-out state, or a second high-ball-out state.

The variable display time of each variation pattern corresponding to the low ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "0" is the same as the variable display time of each variation pattern shown in FIG. The variable display time corresponding to the state flag set to "0" is not extended, but the variation pattern corresponding to the first high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "1" is variable. The display time is a variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) with high appearance frequency, and the non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1- When the variable display time longer than the variable display time of the variation pattern in 4) is set and extended, and the ball output state flag is set to "1", these extended variable display times are not changed. By executing the out-of-reach variable display, the average variable display time becomes longer.

In addition, the variable display time of the variation pattern corresponding to the second high ball output state in which "2" is set in the ball output state flag is the non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) with high appearance frequency and the normal reach. Loss (PA2-1) and normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) variation pattern variable display time corresponds to "1" in ball output state flag Non-reach loss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) and normal reach loss ( PA2-1) and a variable display time longer than the variable display time of the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot are set and extended, and when the ball output state flag is set to "2", these are extended. The average variable display time is further lengthened by executing the variable display of non-reach loss, normal reach loss, and normal reach jackpot of the variable display time.

These extended variable display times are 1 second in the first high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is "1" with respect to non-reach PA1-1, which is a non-shortened variation pattern. It is 1.5 seconds in the second high ball output state where the state flag is "2". is 0.5 seconds in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2", and 1.0 second in the second high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2". Regarding -1 and PB1-1, it is 0 seconds in the first high-ball-out state where the ball-out state flag is "1", and in the second high-ball-out state where the ball-out state flag is "2". 5 seconds.

It should be noted that the length of the variable display time to be extended shown in FIG. 12-8 is an example, and the length of the variable display time may be extended differently from these lengths. For example, in the second high ball output state, the extension may be longer than in the first high ball output state.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 12-8, by extending the variation pattern of non-reach loss, which has a high execution frequency due to the high determination ratio, and the variation pattern of normal reach, which has a high execution frequency compared to super reach, In addition to efficiently lengthening the average variable display time, the data capacity can be reduced by storing multiple data by extending the variable display time for reach and super reach fluctuation patterns, which have a large amount of data related to effects due to the long variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, "1 second" is set as a predetermined extension time for all fluctuation patterns The variable display time may be uniformly added to and extended, and a common presentation using common presentation data may be executed for each variation pattern during the extended period.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 12-8, in the first high ball output state with the ball output state flag of "1", only the non-reach variation pattern is extended, and with the ball output state flag of "2" By increasing the variation patterns to be extended in the second high-ball output state so that the reach variation pattern is also extended when a certain second high-ball-out state occurs, the average variable display time is further increased. Although the extension can be efficiently performed, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to prevent the control load associated with the extension from excessively increasing by extending only the extension further and preventing the variation pattern of the extension target from changing according to the ball output state. .

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 12-8, not only the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time-saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed in the consecutive game period, but also the fluctuation pattern described later In order to cope with the case where a big hit occurs again with a small number of variable display times after the continuous period (advantageous period) ends and the normal state is controlled, the continuous period (advantageous period) ends. In order to extend the variable display in the normal state when the It is not limited to this, and only the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time-saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive game period, may be extended. .

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 162SG, there is a game control data holding area 162SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 162SG150 shown in FIG. 12-9 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 162SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 162SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 162SG153, a game control counter setting unit 162SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 162SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 162SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) occurs, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 162SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 162SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 162SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags including the above-described ball-out state flag.

The game control timer setting unit 162SG153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control timer setting unit 162SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 162SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 162SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 162SG190 shown in FIG. 12-10 (A) includes a production control flag setting unit 162SG191, a production control timer setting unit 162SG192, a production control counter setting unit 162SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 162SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 162SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 162SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 162SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Furthermore, in the startup winning command buffer 162SG194A of the characterizing portion 162SG, whether or not the display pattern has not been determined in the pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 9). Or, in other words, due to the occurrence of a new start winning prize, the display pattern determination is undecided due to the newly stored starting entrance winning designation command, pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and pending memory number notification command. A display undecided flag indicating a, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, and a first special figure pending memory and a second special figure pending memory Each corresponding to A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

In addition, in the reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of start winning of this characteristic part 162SG, a storage area so that the effect limit flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured for each storage area (entry). It should be noted that the effect limit flag means that in the command analysis process (Fig. 12-22), the start winning occurred at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, but the symbol designation command, the variation category designation command, the number of reserved memories This is a flag indicating that the entry is not subject to the pre-reading notice effect when the notification command is not received within a first reserved storage number notification waiting time or a second reserved storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later.

If execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display pattern of the reserved memory display is stored in the reserved display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, When the execution of the reading notice effect is determined, a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U. , and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning (the entry with the youngest buffer number). go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

12-10(B), each time the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 12-10 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, based on FIG. 12-11, the game control main processing of this characterizing portion 162SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-11, even in the game control main process of this feature part 162SG, substantially the same process as the game control main process in the basic configuration of FIG. 4 is executed, but the feature of the game control main process of this feature part 162SG The point is that the contents of the recovery process in S4 are different, and in addition to the initialization process in step S6a, the process in step S6b regarding the initial setting of the ball output state flag is added.

In the recovery process of step S4 of the game control main process of the characteristic part 162SG, the process of recovering the ball output state flag to the state before the power interruption is executed. In addition, as will be described later, in the power interruption processing of step S19 in the game control timer interrupt processing of the feature part 162SG shown in FIG. It contains the data of the flag value of the ball output state flag at the time.

As a specific recovery state of the ball payout state flag, when the value of the ball payout state flag is "0" corresponding to the low ball payout state at the time of power failure, the ball payout state flag is set to "0" by the recovery process. is set, and when the value of the ball payout state flag is "1" corresponding to the first ball payout state at the time of power failure, the ball payout state flag is set to "1" by the recovery process, and when the power failure occurs When the value of the paid-out state flag is "2" corresponding to the second paid-out state, the recovery processing sets the put-out state flag to "2". That is, by the recovery processing of S4, the value of the ball payout state flag is set to the value before the power failure, and the ball payout state before the power failure is restored.

The above-mentioned backup data also includes data on the post-judgment number of consecutive residences and the post-judgment variable display remaining number, which will be described later. The data at the time of power failure is restored by the restoration process.

In this way, the value of the ball-out status flag is restored to the value before the power outage by the recovery processing in step S4, and the data of the number of consecutive games after determination and the number of variable display remaining times after determination are restored. Even if a power failure occurs in the first ball delivery state or the second ball delivery state in which the ball delivery speed is adjusted, the adjustment of the ball delivery speed is not terminated by the power failure, and the power failure is restored. is also continued.

On the other hand, since the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S3, the initialization process of step S6a is executed, and the initial setting (including initialization of various game data such as the number of consecutive games) is executed when the power is turned on. Afterwards, the ball payout state flag is set to "0", which is a value corresponding to the low ball payout state, which is the initial value when the power is turned on. In this way, when the power supply is turned on when the power failure recovery condition is not satisfied (when the power supply is started other than the power failure recovery), the value "0" corresponding to the low ball payout status is set to the ball payout status flag. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inappropriate adjustment of the ball delivery speed when the power is turned on.

Next, based on FIG. 12-12, the timer interrupt processing for game control of this characterizing portion 162SG will be described. The game control timer interrupt process of this characterizing portion 162SG executes each process of steps S21 to S27 in the same manner as the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 5 in the basic configuration, but in addition to these processes, the basic configuration , differs in that it has power-off processing in step S19 omitted, and ball-out state determination processing, which is a feature of the timer interrupt processing for game control of this characterizing portion 162SG.

In the power-off process in step S19, it is detected whether or not a power-off signal has been output from the power supply substrate 17 (whether or not the power supply has been turned on). The power-off signal is a signal that is output when, for example, a power monitor circuit mounted on the power supply board 17 detects a drop in the voltage of the supplied power. When it is detected that the power-off signal is output, as described above, the state of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 includes the above-described ball output state flag, etc., which are necessary for restoring the state at the time of the power failure. Each game data is stored as backup data in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. If it is not detected that the power-off signal has been output, the power-off processing is terminated. After executing the ball output state determination process of step S20, each process of steps S21 to S27 is executed.

Here, the ball output state determination processing in step S20 of the characteristic portion 162SG will be described with reference to FIG. 12-13(a). FIG. 12-13(a) is a flow chart showing an example of the contents of the ball-out state determination process in step S20.

In the ball output state determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 first determines whether the value of the ball output state flag is "0", that is, whether the ball output state is the low ball output state or the first high ball output state. It is determined whether it is the state or the second high-ball state (step 162SGS01).

When the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (step 162SGS01; Y), the number of consecutive games stored in the game control data holding area 162SG150 of the RAM 102 is the first judgment number of "5" or more. It is determined whether or not there is (step 162SGS02). If it is not equal to or greater than the first judgment number of "5", that is, if it is not in the state of consecutive residences or if it is in the state of consecutive residences but the number of times of consecutive residences is less than 5 (step 162SGS02; N), The ball output state determination processing is ended. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive residences is equal to or greater than the first determination number of "5" (step 162SGS02; Y), it is further determined whether or not the number of consecutive residences is equal to or greater than the second determination number of "10". Determine (step 162SGS03).

When the number of consecutive games is not equal to or greater than the second judgment number of "10" (Step 162SGS03; N), that is, when the number of consecutive games reaches "5" which is the first judgment number of times, the first ball is put out. 162SGS06), and the first stage adjustment is started as shown in FIG. 12-13(b) (step 162SGS07 ). As will be described later, the number of consecutive games is updated in the jackpot ending process. Therefore, the fifth jackpot of the number of consecutive games is a jackpot for which the adjustment for the extension of the jackpot period is not executed in the first stage. The jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the jackpots of the 6th to 10th consecutive games.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the jackpot period extension adjustment is performed during the fanfare effect period at the start of the jackpot state, which is a period in which the special variable prize ball device 7 constituting the jackpot is not opened, and the end of the round game. to the start of the next round game, and the ending performance period at the end of the jackpot state are extended from the low ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "0", so that the same number of game balls By extending the period of the jackpot game in which is paid out, the number of game balls paid out per unit time is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 12-21, the extension length of the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period is set to be longer than the first high ball payout state in which the ball payout state flag is set to "1". The second high ball output state in which the ball state flag is set to "2" is set longer, and the jackpot period extension adjustment in the first high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "1" is , the extension length is relatively short first stage jackpot period extension adjustment, the jackpot period extension adjustment of the second high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "2", the extension length is relatively It is a long second stage jackpot period extension adjustment.

Then, the lighting of the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071 is started to start notification of the high-ball state (Step 162SGS08), and the number of variable display times after the high-ball state is determined is a predetermined number. The post-judgment variable display remaining number of times (100) for specifying the remaining number of times until reaching 100 times is set, and the number of consecutive hits that occurred after being judged as a high-ball state is set. After setting the initial value "0" to the number of times (step 162SGS09), the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, a form in which the predetermined number of times is 100 times is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be changed as appropriate.

On the other hand, when the number of consecutive residences is equal to or greater than the second judgment number of "10" (Step 162SGS03; Y), that is, when the number of consecutive residences reaches the second judgment number of "10", the second ball is put out. It was determined that the state was established, and the ball output state flag was set to "2" corresponding to the second ball output state (step 162SGS04), and the second stage adjustment was started as shown in Fig. 12-13(b). After that (step 162SGS05), go to step 162SGS17. Since the number of consecutive games is updated in the jackpot ending process as will be described later, the second-stage jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the jackpot after the 11th consecutive game.

Also, if the value of the ball output status flag is not "0" (step 162SGS01; N), whether or not the number of consecutive games after determination is 10 times or more, which is the number of termination determinations for ending the adjustment, In other words, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive residences after determination has reached 10, which is the end determination number (step 162SGS10). In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, the number of times of end determination is exemplified as 10 times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these numbers are determined according to specifications such as the probability of a big hit and the continuation rate of a big hit. It may be changed as appropriate.

If the number of consecutive games after determination is 10 times or more, which is the end determination number (step 162 SGS10; N), that is, after the number of times of consecutive games is 5 times or more and it is determined to be a high-ball state, the state of consecutive games will be changed. When the number of consecutive game jackpots generated without ending reaches 10 times, it is determined whether or not the game state is a low base state, that is, whether or not the consecutive game state is finished. (Step 162SGS11) If the gaming state is the low base state (Step 162SGS11; Y), the process proceeds to Step 162SGS13. It should be noted that the number of consecutive residences is reset when the consecutive residence state ends and the low base state is entered.

On the other hand, if the post-determination number of consecutive residences is not 10 times or more, which is the end determination number of times (step 162SGS10; N), or the post-determination number of consecutive residences is 10 times or more, which is the end determination number of times (step 162SGS10; Y). If the game state is not the low base state (step 162SGS11; N), it is further determined whether or not the post-judgment variable display remaining number set in step 162SGS09 is "0" (step 162SGS12).

If the post-judgment variable display remaining number is not "0" (step 162SGS12; N), that is, the variable display of 100 times, which is the predetermined number, after the number of consecutive games is 5 or more and it is judged to be in a high-ball state. is not executed, the ball-out state determination processing is terminated.

When the post-judgment variable display remaining number of times is "0" (step 162SGS12; Y), that is, when the variable display has been executed 100 times, which is the predetermined number of times, after being judged as a high ball output state, Go to step 162 SGS13.

In step 162SGS13, by updating the ball payout state flag to "0", after completing the adjustment of the first stage or the second stage (step 162SGS14), lighting of the high ball payout state notification LED 162SG071 is ended. After completing the notification that the adjustment is being carried out in the state of high ball output (step 162SGS15), the post-judgment variable display remaining number and the post-judgment consecutive game number are reset (step 162SGS16), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. .

In step 162SGS17, after execution of transmission setting of a ball payout state designation command corresponding to the value of the ball payout state flag set in any one of step 162SGS04, step 162SGS06 and step 162SGS13, the ball payout state is determined. End the process. Incidentally, the ball output state designation command set for transmission in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

12-13(a) is executed as described above, the value of the ball output state flag changes to the value at the start of power supply as shown in FIG. 12-13(b). Similarly, if it is "0", neither the variable display time extension adjustment for extending the variable display time nor the jackpot period extension adjustment for extending the period of the jackpot game is executed. When the value of the ball output state flag is updated to "1" by determining the high ball output state, the variable display time is extended to the length of the first stage. Extension of the variable display time of the first stage Both the adjustment and the first stage jackpot period extension adjustment in which the period of the jackpot game is extended to the length of the first stage are executed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball output state flag is updated to "2" by determining the second high ball output state in the ball output state determination process, a second stage having a variable display time longer than the first stage is displayed. Both the second stage variable display time extension adjustment extended to the stage length and the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment extended to the second stage length longer than the first stage jackpot game period. The fact that these adjustments are being made is notified by the lighting of the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071.

Furthermore, when the value of the ball output status flag is "1" or "2", when the number of consecutive games after determination reaches the end determination number of times, or when the variable display remaining number after determination becomes 0 (ball output status flag is set to "1" or "2" and the variable display is executed 100 times), the value of the ball output status flag is updated to "0" and the variable display time extension adjustment and jackpot period Extension adjustment ends.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 162SG, a mode is exemplified in which the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 is turned on from the timing when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1", but the present invention is based on this. However, the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 does not turn on from the timing when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1" during a normal game, and the ball output state flag is changed. If a power failure occurs while the value is set to "1" or "2", it may be lit only for a certain period of time after the power failure is restored.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or "2", the form of executing both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment was exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or "2", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be performed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball output state flag is "1", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed, and the value of the ball output state flag is "2". In some cases, both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be performed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 162SG, as shown in FIG. 12-13(a), the CPU 103 transmits a ball output state specifying command to the performance control board 12 only when the value of the ball output state flag changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it transmit to. Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 162SG, a form in which the ball-out state designation command is provided as a part of the effect control command has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of these ball-out state designation commands, , a game state specifying command corresponding to each state of payout balls (low payout state, first high payout state, second high payout state) may be provided.

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 162SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIGS. 12-14. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 162SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 162SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 162SG154, it should be able to identify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 162SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 162SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "1" ( step 162 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 162SGS101 (step 162SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 162 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 162SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, it is sufficient to be able to specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In step 162SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (step 162SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "2" ( step 162 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 162SGS103 and step 162SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 162SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 162SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of step 162SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 162 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 162 SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 162 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 162SGS110, the transmission setting of the start-up prize designation command according to the start-up buffer value is performed (step 162SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 162 SGS111, the winning random number determination processing is executed (step 162 SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 162SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 162SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the starting buffer value is "2" (step 162SGS114; N), after clearing the starting buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 162SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 12-15(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 162SGS112 of FIG. 12-14 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 162SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6, FIGS. result) is regarded as "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6, FIGS. 12-17), which will be described later, determination of variation patterns that specifically define the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 162 SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 12-15 (A), the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) first checks the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152, for example. The current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is identified by checking it (step 162SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the time saving state is when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 162SGS121, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 12-4 is selected and set (step 162SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 162SGS109 in FIGS. 12-14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 162SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 162 SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each judgment value. can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined in step 162SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not result in a jackpot (step 162SGS123; N), the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 12-4 is changed. Select and set (step 162SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 162SGS109 in FIGS. 12-14 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 162SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 162 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 162SGS126), select and set the special hit variation pattern determination table (step 162SGS127), and proceed to step 162SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 162 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 162 SGS 129). If the time saving flag is off (step 162SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 162SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 162SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to these variation pattern determination table A and D, the characteristic portion 162SG includes a variation pattern determination table B for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to A is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range of possible random number values MR3 for variation pattern determination. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 small judgment values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. .

Therefore, in step 162SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

Further, when it is determined in step 162SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 162SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 12-15(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 162 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined big hit type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit B, and the probability variation big hit C in the case of the probability variation big hit C Executes the transmission setting of the fourth symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the fifth symbol designation command (step 162 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (Step 162 SGS 134a). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS135), and step Go to 162SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not the non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 162SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 162 SGS 134b; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS136), go to step 162SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not the variable probability big hit A or the variable probability big hit B (step 162 SGS134b; N), that is, if the determined jackpot type is the variable probability big hit C, select and set the variation pattern determination table for special winning. (step 162SGS137) and proceeds to step 162SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS127, step 162SGS130, step 162SGS131, step 162SGS135, step 162SGS136, and step 162SGS137, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (step 162SGS138). In this characteristic part 162SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 162SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 162SGS132), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIGS. 12-16 are flowcharts showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal processing. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIGS. 12-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 162SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 162SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 162SG154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; N), the second special figure pending storage unit 162SG151B holds stored corresponding to the holding number "1" As data, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 162SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 162 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Along with updating so as to allow, update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B The indicated reserved data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 162SGS144), it moves to step 162SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" at step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 162SGS145). . The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 162SGS145, read the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, it is determined whether the read value is "0". Just do it. Thus, the processing of step 162SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 162SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; N), the first special figure pending storage unit 162SG151A Hold stored corresponding to the hold number "1" As data, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 162SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 162 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the 1st special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1 Along with updating so as to allow, update the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A. Specifically, the random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A The pending data shown is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (step 162SGS148), it moves to step 162SGS149.

In step 162 SGS149, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. select and set. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss" (step 162 SGS 150a). In addition, in this step 162SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the variable probability flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (variable probability state ), it is determined as a “big hit” if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a “loss”. Also, if the probability variation flag is off low probability state, if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined as "big hit", and if not, it is determined as "off" judge.

Thus, in the display result determination table 1 selected in step 162SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. In the processing of 162SGS 150a, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, using different determination data (determination value), the special figure display result is " By determining whether or not to be a "big hit", when the game state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) as a "big hit" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined to be a "jackpot" at step 162SGS150a (step 162SGS150a; Y), the game control flag setting section 162SG152 turns on the jackpot flag (step 162SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-5(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 162 SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “variable probability big win B”, and “variable probability big win C”, according to which one of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be (step 162 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 162 SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to either a time-saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. It is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a result of variable display whether to control to . Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 (step 162SGS155), the determined jackpot type memorize As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "1". If it is "variable probability B" corresponding to B, it is "2", and if it is "variable probability C" that corresponds to variable probability big hit C, it is "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined not to be a "big hit" at step 162SGS150a (step 162SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b to select and set the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 12-4. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure It is determined whether or not the display result is to be a "small hit" (step 162SGS150c). In addition, in step 162SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the judgment value corresponding to the first special figure. , When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 162SGS150c (step 162SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is turned on (step 162SGS151).

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 162SGS150c (step 162SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS156.

In step 162 SGS156, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether the big hit flag is turned on) as a result of pre-determination, whether to control to the small hit game state (whether the small hit flag is turned on) Determined special symbols are set according to the result of prior determination of (whether or not the game is played) and the result of determination of the type of jackpot in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 162SGS150a, if the big hit type at step 162SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", a special symbol showing the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, and a plurality of types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 162SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 162SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure in step 162SGS145 is "0" (step 162SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 162SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

FIGS. 12-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 162SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the specified jackpot type is "variable probability big hit C" (step 162 SGS163), and if it is not "variable probability big hit C", that is, "variable probability big hit A", "variable probability big hit B", "non In the case of either "probability variable jackpot" (step 162 SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" or "probability variable jackpot B". , the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the identified jackpot type is "variable probability jackpot C" (step 162SGS163; Y), a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS165).

In the judgment in step 162SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 162SGS161; N), it is further judged whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166). If the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166; Y), select and set the special hit variation pattern determination table (step 162SGS167), and proceed to step 162SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS166; N), by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152, the game state is a probability variable state or a time saving It is determined whether or not the time saving control is in progress (step 162SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 162 SGS168; Y), select and set the deviation pattern determination table D as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns ( step 162 SGS 169).

On the other hand, when it is not during the time saving control, that is, when the time saving flag is not turned on (step 162SGS168; N), for example provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, storage of the pending memory number counter of the variable special figure By reading the value or the like, the number of pending storage of the fluctuation special figure is specified, and it is determined whether or not the specified number of holding storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170).

When the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 162 SGS170; N), as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss Select and set (step 162SGS171).

In addition, when the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 162 SGS172; Y), the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. (Step 162SGS173).

Also, if the number of pending memories of the identified fluctuation special figure is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 4 (step 162 SGS172; N), the fluctuation pattern is any of a plurality of types Select and set the variation pattern determination table C for failure as the table used for determining .

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS164, step 162SGS165, step 162SGS167, step 162SGS169, step 162SGS171, step 162SGS173, and step 162SGS174, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in, for example, the random number buffer for variation Based on the numerical data indicating, by referring to any of the selected (set) variation pattern determination table for the big hit, the variation pattern determination table for the special hit, or the variation pattern determination table for the loss A to D, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 162SGS175). It should be noted that even if the variation pattern determined in this case is the same variation pattern, if the value of the ball-out state flag at that time is "1", the variation pattern corresponding to the first high-ball-out state is determined. When the variation pattern of the variable display time adjusted by one step is determined, and the value of the ball output state flag at that time is "2", it corresponds to the second high ball output state. A variation pattern of the variable display time subjected to the second-stage extension adjustment is determined.

That is, in step 162SGS175, the variation pattern of the variable display time is determined according to the value of the ball output state flag.

Incidentally, when the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern in the process of step 162SGS175. That is, the process of step 162 SGS170 includes the process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern should be the ready-to-win state when the variable display result is "loss".

After determining the variation pattern in step 162SGS175, according to the variation special symbol designation buffer value, special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B The setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start one of the special symbols games using the second special symbol (step 162SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of step 162SGS176, settings are made for transmitting various commands for when the special symbols start to fluctuate (step 162SGS177). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the first pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (top address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is set to the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in . On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the notification command of the number of second pending memories, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the processing of step 162SGS177, for the variation pattern determined in step 162SGS175, a special figure variable display time, which is a special symbol variable display time corresponding to the value of the ball output state flag, is set (step 162SGS178). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). is the required time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 162SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 162SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. A designation command, a first fluctuation start command or a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command are transmitted in sequence. Become. In addition, the order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. , the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second reserved memory number notification command.

FIGS. 12-18 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of step S113 to end the variation of the special symbols, and displays the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 162SGS180). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special design in the first special design display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (step 162SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS182), and when the big hit flag is turned off (step 162SGS182; N), the small hit flag is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step 162SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the effect control board 12 is set to transmit the hit start 5 designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 162 SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 162 SGS190b). Also, the number of opening times (for example, two times) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter (step 162SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 162SGS190d), which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S118), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is turned on (step 162 SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time saving flag and turns them off (step 162SGS182; Y). 162 SGS 184), hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C ), the setting for transmitting the hit start 4 designation command (non-probable variation) is performed (step 162 SGS 185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state specifying command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 162SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time corresponding to the execution period of the fanfare performance for informing the occurrence of the jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 162 SGS187). At this time, as the big win display time set in the big win display time timer, the big win display time corresponding to the ball output state flag is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-21, if the value of the ball payout state flag is "0", 30000 corresponding to 30000 milliseconds, which is the unextended fanfare effect period corresponding to the low ball payout state. Milliseconds are set as the jackpot display time.

If the value of the ball output state flag is "1", 40000 milliseconds corresponding to 40000 milliseconds which is the fanfare performance period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball output state is set as the jackpot display time, If the value of the ball output state flag is "2", 60000 milliseconds corresponding to 60000 milliseconds which is the fanfare performance period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state is set as the jackpot display time. .

Then, set the number of opening times (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability variable jackpot or probability variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of probability variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of probability variable jackpot C) in the big win opening counter. After that (step 162SGS188), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 162SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS183; N), at step 162SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". It should be noted that, although not particularly illustrated in the present characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103, if the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game end processing is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the probability variation flag and the time saving flag. Both are turned on (the game state is controlled to a high-probability/high-base state) and "0" is set as the value of the time-saving number counter, and the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game end processing is variable-probability jackpot C. If there is, the variable probability flag is turned on (the game state is controlled to a high probability low base state) and "0" is set as the value of the time saving number counter. Then, when the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game end processing is the non-probable variable jackpot, the CPU 103 turns on the time saving flag and sets "100" as the value of the time saving number counter. ing. Otherwise, go to step 162 SGS 196 .

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 162 SGS190; N), that is, if the high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (step 162 SGS 191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is "0" (step 162SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 162SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 162SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, after clearing the time-saving flag to turn off (step 162SGS194), corresponding to the state of the probability variable flag or time-saving flag After setting the transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low-probability-low base) (step 162SGS195), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196. It should be noted that the number of consecutive residences is also reset along with the execution of step 162SGS195.

Then, a post-judgment variable display remaining count update process is executed (step 162 SGS 196 ). In this post-judgment variable display remaining number updating process, it is judged whether or not the post-judgment variable display remaining number is "0". If the value is "0" after subtraction, the post-determination variable display remaining count update process is terminated.

Next, in step 162SGS197, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 12-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 162SGS201). When the big win end display timer is not in operation (step 162 SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect for displaying the big win end on the image display device 5 is set as the big win end display time in the big win end display timer. (step 162SGS202), and the process ends.

At this time, as the jackpot end display time set in the jackpot end display timer, a jackpot end display time corresponding to the ball output state flag is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-21, if the value of the ball payout state flag is "0", a timer corresponding to 60000 milliseconds, which is the unextended ending effect period corresponding to the low ball payout state, is activated. Value is set. Further, if the value of the ball payout state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 70000 milliseconds, which is the ending rendering period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball payout state, is set and the ball payout state is set. If the value of the flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 90000 milliseconds, which is the ending effect period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state, is set.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 162SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 162SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not the non-variable probability jackpot (step 162SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot C (step 162SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is variable probability jackpot C (step 162SGS206; Y), after turning on the variable probability flag (step 162SGS210), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the variable probability jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B (step 162 SGS206; N), the variable probability flag is turned on (step 162 SGS207), After turning on the time saving flag (step 162SGS208) and setting "0" to the time saving frequency counter (step 162SGS209), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS205; Y), by executing steps 162SGS211 and 162SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set to the time saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

In step 162SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and transmission setting of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (step 162SGS214). Then, transmission setting of a game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability variable flag and the time saving flag which are turned on is performed (step 162 SGS215).

Then, the update processing of the number of consecutive residences and the number of consecutive residences after determination is executed (step 162SGS216). Specifically, in this updating process, it is determined whether the finished jackpot is the first jackpot that occurred in the low base state as described above or the Renso jackpot that occurred in the high base state. It is specified from the value of the state flag before the start of the jackpot corresponding to the state before the occurrence of (“0” for low base, “1” for high base). Set to "1". On the other hand, in the case of a big win for consecutive villas, since the number of consecutive villas has already become a value other than "0", the number of consecutive villas is updated by adding one. Further, in the case of a big hit, if the initial value is set for the number of consecutive games after determination, the number of consecutive games after determination is updated by adding one.

And, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 162SGS217).

In addition, although not shown in particular, in the characteristic part 162SG, when the CPU 103 does not reach the upper limit number of rounds in which the number of times of execution of the round is set in the process after opening the jackpot (step S116), set interval period timer. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-21, if the value of the ball output state flag is "0", the timer value corresponding to the non-extended interval period of 5000 milliseconds corresponding to the low ball output state set. Also, if the value of the paid ball state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 6000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high paid ball state, is set. Also, if the value of the paid ball state flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 7000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high paid ball state, is set.

After setting these timer values in the interval period timer, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the interval period timer every time the process after opening the jackpot is executed, and the interval period timer is timed out. Along with performing opening control of the winning opening, the value of the special figure process is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the opening of the big hit, that is, a new round game is started.

12-20, in the present characterizing portion 162SG, during the period from the derivation display of the jackpot symbol to the end of the jackpot game based on the derivation display of the jackpot symbol, the ball output state flag is set. Regardless of the value, since the round game continues until a certain open period (for example, 29 seconds) passes or a certain number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls enter the big winning opening, the ball output state flag The number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 and 12-21, the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole due to the closing of the big winning hole, that is, the fanfare effect that it is impossible to win the prize ball The period, the interval period, and the ending effect period are lengthened as the value of the ball output state flag changes from 0→1→2.

For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value of the ball state flag. The number of prize balls paid out per unit time is increased by changing (prolonging) the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period, which are periods in which winning is not possible, according to the value of the ball output state flag. It is possible to suppress it.

Next, processing that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 12-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 12-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 162SGS221).

If there is a received command in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 162 SGS222). And, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS222; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS223). For example, in the process of step 162SGS223, the timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set to the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 Just do it.

If the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command at step 162SGS222 (step 162SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS225). For example, in the process of step 162 SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception wait time for the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

At step 162SGS224, if the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 162SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 162SGS226 (step 162SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 162SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 162SGS227 (step 162SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS228). Then, when it is the first reserved storage number notification command (step 162SGS228; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS229). .

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 162SGS228 (step 162SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS230). When it is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 162SGS230; Y), the waiting time for notification of the second reserved storage number is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS231). .

Then, after executing either of the processes of step 162SGS229 and step 162SGS231, the display undetermined flag of the stored entry is set to "1" indicating that the pending display mode is undetermined (display undetermined flag is turned on), and if there is an unreceived command, the effect limit flag is set to "1" (the display limit flag is turned on) (step 162SGS232).

If the command received at step 162SGS226 is a design designation command (step 162SGS226; Y), or if the command received at step 162SGS227 is a variable category command (step 162SGS227; Y), or step 162SGS223, step 162SGS225, step 162SGS232 After executing any of the processing of 1), the received command is stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A (not shown) (step 162SGS233), and the processing returns to step 162SGS221.

Incidentally, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the start winning receive command buffer 162SG194A.

At step 162SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS230; N), after setting according to other received commands (step 162SGS234), the process returns to step 162SGS221. For example, if the received command is a ball-out state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball-out state from the ball-out state designation command in the process of step 162SGS234, A process such as turning on a flag may be executed. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the ball-out state by referring to the flag.

If there is no received command in the command reception buffer at step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first pending storage count notification waiting time or the second pending storage count notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162 SGS237). If the waiting time for notification of the number of reserved memories or the waiting time for notification of the number of reserved memories has not elapsed (step 162 SGS237; N), the command analysis process is terminated, and When the number notification waiting time has passed (step 162SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the corresponding entry whose storage is not completed is set to "1" in the effect restriction flag (the display undecided flag is turned on), End command analysis processing.

FIG. 12-23 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-23, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning (step 162SGS241), and whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. is determined by whether or not there is an entry whose display undecided flag is ON (step 162SGS242a).

If there is no entry whose display undetermined flag is ON (step 162SGS242a; N), proceed to step 162SGS252, and if there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is ON (step 162SGS242a; Y), further determination It is determined whether or not the remaining number of times of post-variable display is equal to or less than the limited number of times of pre-reading (step 162SGS242b). If the post-judgment variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the look-ahead limit count (step 162SGS242b; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set to the pending display flag. set.

Also, if the post-judgment variable display remaining count is greater than the look-ahead limit count (step 162 SGS242b; N), whether or not the effect limit flag of the entry is on (whether "1" is set). is determined (step 162SGS242c). If the effect limit flag is ON (step 162SGS242c; Y), the process proceeds to step 162SGS250, and as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set to the pending display flag.

On the other hand, if the effect limit flag is off (step 162SGS242b; N), whether the design designation command of the entry is the fourth design designation or the sixth design designation command, that is, the design designation command is a probability variable jackpot It is determined whether or not it is a symbol designating command indicating C or a small hit (step 162 SGS243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a variable probability big hit C or a small hit (step 162SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is changed. , the pending display flag is set. In other words, the pre-reading announcement effect is not executed with respect to the holding memory for the probability variable big win C or the small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first design designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a command indicating a loss (Step 162SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either of probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot B, or non-probability variation jackpot) (step 162 SGS243b; N), the entry The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command (step 162SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193, and the jackpot type specified in step 162SGS244, prefetching at the time of the jackpot (not shown) By referring to the notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the read advance notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the read advance notice effect (step 162SGS245).

In step 162 SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (forecast type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 12-24(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-24(A), the determination ratio of the presence/absence of pre-reading notice effects and the display pattern (notice type) is changed according to the jackpot type specified in the process of step 162 SGS244. .

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as display patterns (forecast type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display. Displayed in area 5U.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit other than the probability variable jackpot C, there is no case where the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always decided and the display pattern (notice type) Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β (announcement type) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A", the ratio of display pattern β to be determined as the display pattern (notice type) is determined by display pattern α. is set higher than the On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" or "non-probability variable jackpot", the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined. set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the variable probability big win A, and the player's expectation for the variable probability big win A can be increased.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than the probability variable jackpot C, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always determining the execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in a white star (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C. Even in cases other than "big hit", it may be possible to determine non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "loss".

Further, in step 162SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is ON is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a failure (step 162SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is specified (step 162 SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, specify that it is a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is specified and C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation pattern including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193, and the category of the variation pattern specified in step 162SGS247 (not shown) Whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined by referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table (step 162 SGS248).

In step 162SGS248, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 12-24(B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-24 (B), depending on the category of the variation pattern specified in the processing of step 162 SGS247, whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (preview type) making it different.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (preliminary notice types), that is, a display pattern α and a display pattern β are provided. Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is a white square (◇), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area. 5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5D It is displayed in the storage display area 5U. Incidentally, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U in a round shape (○) which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 12-24 (B), when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", the rate at which the pre-reading forewarning effect is executed (the rate determined for other than "no forewarning effect") is set higher. In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", it is more likely than the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "others". The rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed (the rate at which other than "no notice effect" is determined) is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", if the fluctuation category is "other", than if the fluctuation pattern category is "non-reach" Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the percentage of display pattern α determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "others". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach" when the category of the variation pattern is "others". The percentage of display pattern β determined is set higher than in the case, and when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other" The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach" is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-24(A), when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no notice effect). The rate at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the variation pattern categories when the variable display result is "loss". is set higher than the

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "loss (non-reach)", "loss (super reach)", or "loss (other)", the display pattern α is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variable A)", when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than

With such settings, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is a "probability variable big hit A". Since the ratio of , the expectation of the player can be increased.

After execution of step 162SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 162SGS247, that is, determines the display pattern (preview type) to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (Step 162SGS249).

After step 162 SGS245 is executed or when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 162 SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 162 SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS251.

Further, in step 162SGS249, if the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined (step 162SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating white "o" (step 162SGS250), go to step 162SGS251.

After executing step 162SGS246 or step 162SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 162SGS251). After that, the pending display is updated based on the stored contents of the receive command buffer 162SG194A at the time of start winning (step 162SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the receive command buffer 162SG194A at the time of start winning is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag. be. Also, when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are shifted, according to the storage contents of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A after the shift, the As shown in A), the pending display in the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-25 (B), if the number of first special figure pending storage is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As a display form of this reserved memory display, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", as shown in FIG. When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed in the display mode. In addition, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is two, two pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D. Also, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is three, three pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D. Also, if the number of first special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D.

In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. displayed in the form. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending storage is two, for example, as shown in FIG. As a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag, for example, the second pending memory display in the display mode of "○" for the pending memory display of 1 and the display mode of "☆" for the pending memory display of 1 Displayed in area 5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage display is displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 5U.

Each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and as shown in FIG. 162SG shifts toward the center of the screen).

In other words, if the pending memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 162SG194A is shifted by consuming the pending memory in the variable display start setting process, which is executed at the start of the variable display and will be described later, then the after shifting start winning time Based on the pending memory of the received command buffer 162SG194A, the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. , the display pattern of the reserved memory is determined and set to the reserved display flag, and the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5D are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set to the reserved display flag. It comes to be displayed in the storage display area 5U.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 162SG, the form of executing the processing of step 162SGS252 in the pre-reading notice setting processing is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. And the process for updating the pending display in the second pending storage display area 5U may be executed separately as a process (for example, pending display update process) different from the pre-reading notice setting process.

Further, in this characteristic part 162SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning at step 162SGS242, execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the holding storage at the starting winning is determined. New storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 162SGS242 due to the simultaneous occurrence of the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening If it is determined that there is, that is, if the entry whose display undecided flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage, both entries are pre-read notice It is the target for determining whether to execute the production or not. Both the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the first special plan is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special plan are newly stored are stored depending on the execution and non-execution of the advance notice effect. In the case of a decision target, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pending display of the pending storage of the first special symbol and the pending display of the second special symbol There is a case where the pre-reading forewarning effects are simultaneously executed in both displays.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, as described above, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is Both of the newly stored reserved memory and the newly stored reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but this invention is this In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan Only one of them may be determined to execute.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special symbol is suspended in the second special symbol. Priority is given to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading announcement effect by memory. Then, when it is determined to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan is unambiguously determined to be non-execution, and the first special plan When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution and non-execution of pre-reading notice effect in pending storage in the second special figure is determined with priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice performance in the reserved storage in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan, it is unambiguously decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, and the second special plan When it is determined not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 12-26 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is ON (step 162SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 162SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 162 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off at step 162SGS271 (step 162SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 162SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning, 1 buffer number each Shift up (step 162SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 162SGS272 or step 162SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 162SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 162SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the characteristic part 162SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit C, the stopping symbol is the same chance number as the small hit, such as "334" or "778". to decide from In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, "334", "778", etc., which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C, are used as stop symbols. to decide from Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the first variable display result specifying command corresponding to the loss, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the three patterns are irregular as the stop pattern. It is a pattern, and a combination (losing pattern) other than the above-described chance eye is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, a combination of reach-lost decorative patterns such as "121" and "464" (losing pattern) ).

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 12-27 to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect in the variable display (step 162SGS277). In addition, in the present characterizing section 162SG, in the announcement effect determination processing, as will be described later, an example of a form in which execution of one of the four announcement effects A to D can be determined is exemplified. is not limited to this, and the number of executable notice effects may be 3 or less or 5 or more.

In the notice effect determination processing of the characterizing portion 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the ball-out state and sets the notice effect type determination table corresponding to the specified ball-out state (step 162SGS290). It should be noted that the ball-out state may be specified, for example, from the value of a flag that is turned on when a ball-out state designation command is received in the command analysis process.

Here, as shown in FIG. 12-28, when the effect control CPU 120 specifies the low ball output state as the low ball output state, it selects the advance notice effect type determination table A and sets the ball output state to the first high ball output state. If the ball-out state is specified, the table B for determining the type of advance notice effect is selected.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 162SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display for designating a variable display result (loss, variable probability big win A, variable probability big win B, variable probability big win C, non-variable probability big win, small win) transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above.

Then, the random number for determining the announcement effect is extracted, and the presence or absence of execution of the announcement effect and the type of the announcement effect in the case of execution are determined using the table for determining the type of announcement effect set in step 162SG290 (step 162SGS292).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-28, when the ball payout state is the low ball payout state, using the advance notice effect type determination table A, if the variable display result is not reachable, 85 10% to decide not to execute the notice effect, 10% to decide to execute the notice effect A, 5% to decide to execute the notice effect B, and 0% to decide the execution of the notice effect C. Execution is decided, and the execution of the advance notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of super reach, non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 50%, and execution of the notice effect B is decided at a rate of 30%. Execution of the advance notice performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the notice performance D is determined at a rate of 0%. If the result of the variable display is a big win other than the big win C, non-execution of the advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the notice performance A is determined at a rate of 25%, and notice performance is determined at a rate of 65%. Execution of B is determined, execution of notice performance C is decided at a rate of 0%, and execution of notice performance D is decided at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state, using the notice effect type determination table B, if the variable display result is non-reach, the notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. Execution of notice effect A is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of notice effect B is decided at a rate of 5%, execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%, and execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%. Execution of the advance notice effect D is determined. If the variable display result is out of super reach, non-execution of the advance notice effect is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 50%, and execution of the notice effect B is decided at a ratio of 25%. Execution of the advance notice performance C is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the notice performance D is determined at a rate of 0%. If the result of the variable display is a big win other than the big win C, non-execution of the advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the notice performance A is determined at a rate of 25%, and notice performance is determined at a rate of 50%. Execution of B is determined, execution of notice performance C is decided at a rate of 15%, and execution of notice performance D is decided at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball output state is the second high ball output state, using the notice effect type determination table C, if the variable display result is non-reach, the notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. Execution of advance notice effect A is decided at a rate of 8%, execution of notice effect B is decided at a rate of 4%, execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 3%, and execution of notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%. Execution of the advance notice effect D is determined. If the result of the variable display is out of super reach, non-execution of the advance notice effect is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 45%, and execution of the notice effect B is decided at a ratio of 20%. Execution of the advance notice performance C is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution of the notice performance D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the result of the variable display is a big hit other than the big win C, non-execution of the advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the notice performance A is determined at a rate of 15%, and notice performance is determined at a rate of 45%. Execution of B is determined, execution of advance notice performance C is decided at a rate of 20%, and execution of notice performance D is decided at a rate of 10%.

In other words, as the advance notice effect in the present characteristic portion 162SG, the notice effect D has the highest degree of expectation for the big hit (the ratio of the variable display results to be a big hit), and the notice effect C has a higher degree of expectation for the big hit than the notice effect D. The degree of expectation for big win is set lower in the advance notice performance B than in the advance notice performance C, and in the advance notice performance A, the degree of expectation for big win is set lower than that in the notice performance B.例文帳に追加Then, when the notice effect is not executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit is set lower than when any of the notice effects is executed (expectation for the big hit: notice effect D> notice effect C> notice effect B> notice effect A> non-execution of advance notice effect).

Also, looking at the number of notice effects that can be executed in each state, there are two notice effects that can be executed in the low ball state, the notice effects A and B, and the first high ball state. There are three notice effects: notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, and notice effects that can be executed in the second high ball state are notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, notice effect D. There are four. In other words, in this characteristic portion 162SG, since the number of advance notice effects that can be executed during the variable display increases by continuing the continuous game state after the first hit occurs, the game is slowed down during the continuous game. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the storage.

In particular, in the second high-ball output state, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect D that confirms that the variable display result will be a big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game is played, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Returning to FIG. 12-27, after executing step 162SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (step 162SGS293). If execution of the announcement effect is not determined (step 162 SGS293; N), the announcement effect determination process is terminated. Further, when the execution of the notice effect is determined (step 162SGS293; Y), the notice effect type determined in step 162SGS292 is stored (step 162SGS294), the notice effect execution determination flag is turned on (step 162SGS295), and the notice Terminate the effect determination process.

After executing the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 returns to the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. No, that is, it is determined whether or not any one of the "notice effect A" and "notice effect B" has been decided in the notice effect determination process of step 162 SGS277.

When the notice effect execution determination flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step 162SGS279, sets a timer for waiting for the start of notice effect to a value corresponding to the period until the start of notice effect (step 162SGS279), and executes the notice effect. The determination flag is turned off (step 162SGS280), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS281. On the other hand, when the announcement effect execution determination flag is off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS281 without going through steps 162SGS279 and 162SGS280.

As for the period until the start of these advance notice effects, the characterizing section 162SG performs an effect (not shown) indicating a sign of the execution of the notice effect before the timing at which the notice effect is started, and the start of the notice effect is started. Since the timing is the start timing of the notice effect, a period shorter than the period until the start of the notice effect is set, and the start timing of these notice effects is set in the process table of the notice effect executed from the start of the notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if these foreshadowing effects are not implemented in the foreshadowing effect, the foreshadowing effect is started. Since the start timing is the start timing of the notice effect, the period until the start timing of the notice effect may be set in the notice effect start waiting timer.

At step 162 SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball output state, and selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the specified ball output state and the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 162SGS282).

In step 162SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 may specify the ball output state by referring to the value of the effect ball output state flag set in the process of step 162SGS234 of the command analysis process.

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 162SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to commands.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the specified ball output state and the variation pattern specification command (step 162 SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 162SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the obtained image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 162SGS286).

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, so that the characterizing portion 162SG determines whether the payout state is any of the low payout state, the first high payout state, and the second high payout state. Even , it is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative design in conjunction with the special figure variable display time. In addition, in this characterizing portion 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which it is possible to execute the variable display of the decoration pattern according to the ball output state by the value of the output ball state flag for effect and the variation pattern designation command. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A command can be transmitted to the performance control board 12 (performance control CPU 120), and the performance control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command and the variation pattern determination state designation command, each time it receives a decorative pattern according to the ball output state. may be executed.

FIG. 12-29 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (step 162SGS301, step 162SGS302, step 162SGS303). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the timer for waiting for the start of the notice effect is set (it is decided to perform the notice effect), or the flag during execution of the notice effect is on (during the execution of the notice effect). Yes) (step 162SGS304; Y), the advance notice effect processing is executed (step 162SGS305). When both the timer for waiting for the start of the announcement effect and the in-execution flag for the announcement effect are off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS306 without executing the announcement effect process of step 162SGS305.

At step 162 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 162SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 162 SGS308). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 162SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance component) is executed (step 162SGS309b).

Next, it is checked whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 162SGS311). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 162SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 162SGS310; N), after executing step 162SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out (step 162SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 162 SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination designation command is received is in the ON state (step 162 SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the fluctuation. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer for the last process data n expires in the processing of step 162 SGS306, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and decorative pattern variable display control based on the process table is performed. ends.

In addition, when the notice effect is executed in a state where the notice effect start waiting timer is set, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts and updates the value of the notice effect start waiting timer in the notice effect process, and starts the notice effect. Determine whether the wait timer has timed out. When the advance notice effect start waiting timer times out, that is, when it is time to start the notice effect, a process table for notice effect corresponding to the type of notice effect determined to be executed is selected, and the process for the notice effect is selected. Start a timer. That is, the effect device is controlled in accordance with the content of the first process data in the process table for notice effect. Also, the notice effect execution flag is turned on, and the notice effect processing is terminated.

When the notice effect is executed when the notice effect executing flag is on, the effect control CPU 120 updates the process timer for the notice effect by subtraction, and the process timer for the notice effect has timed out. Determine whether or not If the process timer for notice effect has not timed out, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer being executed, and if the process timer for notice effect has timed out , to switch the process data. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 may start the process timer for the next notice effect anew and control the effect device according to the contents of the next process data. By executing the notice effect processing as described above, the notice effect can be executed during the variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 162SG described above, the high-ball state notification LED 162SG071 is exemplified as a form in which only lighting and extinguishing are performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the high-ball state , the variable display time extension adjustment is performed because the variable display is performed, but the jackpot period extension adjustment is not performed because the jackpot state is not performed. When the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed due to the jackpot state in the ball state, but the variable display time extension adjustment is not executed because the variable display is not executed, the light is lit in red (second mode). , it may be possible to confirm (know) which adjustment is being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG described above, the continuous state continues and the value of the ball output state flag is updated from 0→1→2 (when the ball output state changes from the low ball output state to the first high State, changing to the second high ball output), by lengthening the fanfare performance period, the interval period, and the ending performance period of the jackpot game in the continuous state, the balls paid out per unit time. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the number of prize balls is suppressed, that is, the awarding speed of prize balls is reduced, the present invention is not limited to this. By determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table for the high output ball state, which has a high determination rate of the variation pattern with a longer special figure variation time such as the variation pattern of super reach than the ball state, it is controlled to the big hit game state. It is also possible to lengthen the period up to and suppress the number of balls released per unit time.

In addition, in the first high-ball state and the second high-ball state, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect for the form in which the variation pattern can be determined using the high-ball state variation pattern determination table. When the variable display remaining number after determination is set to 0 when the post-variable display remaining number is still set to a value of 1 or more, variable display execution pattern is performed after the post-determination variable display remaining number becomes 0. There is a big difference between the variation pattern suggested by and the variation pattern actually selected in the variable display (for example, despite suggesting variable display in the super reach variation pattern as a pre-reading notice effect, it is actually non- variable display is executed according to the variation pattern of the reach), and there is a possibility that the pre-reading notice effect becomes inappropriate.

Therefore, as shown in step 162SGS242a of the pre-reading notice setting process (see FIG. 12-23) of the feature part 162SG, the pre-reading notice effect is executed when the post-judgment variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit count. By limiting , it is possible to prevent a large difference between the variation pattern suggested by the performance pattern of the pre-reading notice effect and the variation pattern actually selected in the variable display, thereby making the pre-reading notice effect inappropriate. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In addition, although not particularly shown in the characteristic portion 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect ball output state flag in the jackpot middle effect process shown in FIG. By selecting a process table for fanfare effect according to the state of the game, and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer, the fanfare effect corresponding to the state of ball output may be executed.

Further, although not particularly shown in the characteristic portion 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect ball output state flag in the ending effect process shown in FIG. The ending effect corresponding to the state of ball output may be executed by selecting the process table for the corresponding ending effect and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination processing shown in FIG. When it is determined that the ball output state is the high ball output state, the value of the ball output state flag is changed from "0" corresponding to the low ball output state to the high ball output state. By setting it to "1", which is a value corresponding to , the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are lengthened (adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time is started. ) is possible. After setting the ball output state flag to "1", the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" based on the execution of the variable display 100 times, that is, the ball output state is set to high. By updating from the ball output state to the low ball output state, the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are returned to the original period. ). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls put out per unit time during the period in which the state is continuous, and to prevent excessive increase in gambling property due to excessive payout of prize balls in a short period of time. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when the value of the ball output state flag is set from "0" to "1", as shown in FIG. By extending the length of time and not extending the special variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach, the increase in the amount of data related to the variable display is suppressed, and the variable display time of super reach and normal reach is extended. It prevents the decline of interest due to the fact.

In addition, in this characterizing section 162SG, by setting the value of the ball output state flag from "0" to "1", adjustment is started to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time, and 100 times of variable display is performed. An example has been exemplified in which the value of the ball-out state flag is set to "0" again based on the execution, thereby ending the adjustment for reducing the speed of paying out prize balls, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, a time measuring means (for example, real-time clock or timer) capable of measuring time is provided, and the time measuring means measures a certain time (for example, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, etc.) from the start of the adjustment. to end the adjustment. In other words, the termination condition in the present invention may be that "a certain period of time has elapsed during the period of the consecutive game state after the CPU 103 set the value of the ball-out state flag to "1"."

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 162SG, as an end condition for ending the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time, only one execution of the variable display 100 times was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of termination conditions may be provided for terminating the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of prize balls per unit time. When a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the adjustment are provided in this way, the adjustment may be terminated when any one of the termination conditions is satisfied, or the adjustment may be terminated when a plurality of termination conditions are satisfied. You may make it finish adjustment.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8, when the value of the payout state flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, when the payout state is the first high payout state or the second high payout state state, the special figure variable display time in the variation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" (when the ball output state is a low ball output state) Therefore, by prolonging the period required for the variable display, it is possible to lengthen the time interval until the variable display result becomes a big win during the period of the continuous game state, and the number of prize balls paid out in the big win game state can be increased. It is possible to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls during the period of the continuous residence state without reducing the speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 and 12-21, during the jackpot game, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball output state flag, the value of the ball output state flag The fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period, in which the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole, are set longer than when "0" is set. For this reason, the number of game balls that can be won during each round game is not reduced according to the value of the ball output state flag, and the game balls cannot enter the big winning opening between each round game during the big win game. The period can be lengthened, and the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time can be reduced during the period of the continuous state.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball output state flag, the jackpot game is more likely than when "0" is set as the value of the ball output state flag. Although the three periods of the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period are exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or When "2" is set, any one of the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game than when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0", or You may make it lengthen two periods.

Further, in the characteristic part 162SG, the fanfare performance period, the interval period, and the ending performance period during the jackpot game are gradually lengthened by updating the value of the ball output state flag from 0 to 1 to 2. , but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1", the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period If one or two of the periods are lengthened and the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "1" to "2", the remaining periods may be lengthened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-11, when the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing at the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the recovery condition is not met, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to low ball output. Since "0" corresponding to the state is set, it is possible to prevent the execution of adjustment for reducing the payout speed of prize balls per unit time from the start of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Furthermore, when the recovery upper limit is established, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after power failure occurs, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2" at the time of power failure. If it is set, the CPU 103 again sets the value of the ball output state flag to "1" or "2", so that the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls is performed when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from the power failure. can be resumed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 162SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from power failure, if the value of the ball output state flag at the time of power failure is set to "1" or "2", the CPU 103 Although the form in which "1" or "2" is set again as the value of the status flag has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The value of the status flag may be set to "0", that is, the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize balls, which has been performed at the time of power failure, may not be performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored as backup data when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-13, when the CPU 103 determines that the high ball output state is in the ball output state determination processing, the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 starts lighting up under the control of the CPU 103. It is possible to recognize from outside the pachinko machine 1 that the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of prize balls is being performed by lighting the high-ball-out state notification LED 162SG071.

In addition, in this characterizing part 162SG, the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 can be turned on under the control of the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. An LED that can be turned on under the control of the CPU 120 may be used. In this case, for example, the game control means (CPU103) can be transmitted to the effect control means (performance control CPU120) the control information (production control command) that can specify whether or not the high grant state. Then, the effect control means is provided with a notification means (high ball state notification LED 162 SG071) that can notify that it is controlled to a high grant state in response to specifying that it is a high grant state from the control information. Just do it.

In addition, in this characterizing part 162SG, as an informing means capable of informing that the high award state (high ball payout state) is determined in the present invention, a mode in which the high ball payout state notification LED 162SG071 is provided was exemplified, but the present invention. is not limited to this, the notification means includes sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) for notifying that the high-ball state is determined by a specific sound output, high-ball state and Image display means (e.g., image display device 5) for notifying that the judgment is being made by displaying a specific image, and information output means capable of outputting information (signal) corresponding to the judgment as being in a high-ball state etc.

Also, the control cycle of lighting and extinguishing of the high output ball state notification LED 162SG071 is the same as the control cycle of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. So, the CPU 103 can execute the notification by the high output ball state notification LED 162SG071 in the lighting/extinguishing control common to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. It has become.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing shown in FIG. It is possible to transmit a ball-out state designation command to the system CPU 120). Then, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball-out state from the received ball-out state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and sets the specified ball-out state. Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during variable display and the effect type of the advance notice effect to be executed can be determined using the corresponding advance notice effect type determination table. In particular, in the characteristic portion 162SG, the notice effect (prediction effect type) that can be executed when the ball payout state is the low ball payout state, the first high ball payout state, and the second ball payout state. are different from each other, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the advance notice effect according to the ball-out state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-28, this characterizing portion 162SG is executed when the ball payout state is the low ball payout state, the first high ball payout state, and the second ball payout state. Although the form in which the possible notice effect (type of notice effect) is different has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. , in the case of the second ball-out state, the executable notice effect (forecast effect type) may be the same, but the determination ratio of each notice effect type may be different, and the ball-out state is low. In the ball state, the first high ball state, and the second ball state, the executable notice effect (prediction effect type) and the determination ratio of each notice effect type are the same. There may be.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, it is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit during the variable display, and the type of the notice effect that can be executed is made different according to the state of the ball being put out. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A continuation-suggesting effect that suggests continuation can be executed in a plurality of types of effects, and if the ball-out state is a low ball-out state, if it is in a first high-ball-out state, it is in a second high-ball-out state. Depending on the case, the determination ratio of executable effect types and executable effect types may be varied as these probability-variable suggestive effects and continuous suggestive effects.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-23, the effect control CPU 120 can display the pending display of the new pending memory generated by the start winning in a plurality of display patterns by executing the pre-reading notice setting process. A pre-reading advance notice effect can be executed, and the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is varied according to which display pattern the pending display is displayed. Further, in the feature part 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-reading notice effect when the post-judgment variable display remaining number of times is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number of times in the pre-reading notice setting process. (marked with an open circle)), so when the pre-reading notice effect is executed for the pending memory that occurred in the start winning in the first high-ball state or the second high-ball state, the pre-reading It is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from becoming inappropriate due to the change of the ball payout state to the low ball payout state before the start of the variable display based on the reserved memory which is the target of the notice effect. It's becoming

Further, in this characteristic part 162SG, when the ball payout state is the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state, if the post-judgment variable display remaining count is equal to or less than the predictive limit count, prefetching notice effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the ball-out state is the first high-ball-out state or the second high-ball-out state, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed univocally. You may do so.

The features of this invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of this invention are included in this invention. be

For example, in the characteristic portion 162SG, when the ball output state is the high ball output state, the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period during the jackpot game are set longer than when the ball output state is the low ball output state. In addition, adjustment was made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time by prolonging the special figure variable display time of some variation patterns, but this invention is not limited to this. , As a modified example 162SG-1, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the determination ratio of the probability variable jackpot A as the jackpot type is reduced and the probability variable jackpot B is reduced more than when the ball output state is a low ball output state. may be increased. By doing so, when the ball output state is the high ball output state, the jackpot type is likely to be determined as the variable probability jackpot B with the number of rounds of 5 rounds, and at the same time as the variable probability jackpot A with the number of lands of 10 rounds. Since it becomes difficult to determine, the number of prize balls put out in one big win game can be reduced, and as a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment to lower the speed of putting out prize balls in a high payout state.

Furthermore, as a modification 162SG-2, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the probability variable jackpot (variable probability A, variable jackpot B, variable probability By reducing the determination ratio of the big win C) and increasing the determination ratio of the non-probability variable jackpot, it may be easier to be controlled to the time saving state (low probability high base state) after the end of the big win game. By doing this, in the time saving state (low probability high base state), the ratio of the variable display results to be a big hit than the probability variable state (high probability high base state) is reduced, so as a result 100 times in the time saving state By executing the variable display, it becomes easier to determine the end of the continuous game state, and it becomes easier to control to the normal state. It is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of prize balls in the ball-out state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determination means" in this invention is the processing of steps 162SGS190 to step 162SGS194 in the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Processing to subtract the value of the number counter, processing to determine again the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction, processing to turn off the time saving flag) corresponds.

In addition, the CPU 103 of the characteristic portion 162SG changes the game state from the time-saving state (low probability high base state) to the normal state (low probability low base state), that is, to terminate the continuous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 controls the high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), every time the variable display is started in the special symbol normal processing or each time the variable display is terminated in the special symbol stop processing, a drop lottery (end lottery) in the high base state is executed, and the lottery is executed. It may be controlled to a high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) low probability low base state based on the winning, that is, to end the continuous state. In the case where the drop lottery is executed each time the variable display is started or terminated, for example, when the ball output state is the high ball output state, the ball output state is the low ball output state. It is sufficient to make it easier to win the drop lottery at a higher rate than in the case. In this way, in the high-ball output state, it is easy to determine the end of the consecutive game state, and it is easy to be controlled to the normal state. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of the prize balls in the high-ball-out state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determining means" of the present invention is a process for executing a drop lottery when the CPU 103 starts variable display in the special symbol normal process or when the special symbol stop process is executed. , The process of turning off the probability variation flag and the time saving flag when winning the falling lottery corresponds.

In the characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" under the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times. Change the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state to the low ball payout state on the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state. Although the form of control has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-3, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to "1" and then The value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" based on the execution of a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of the jackpot game during the period. is set to "1" and then a predetermined number of jackpot games have been executed during the period of the continuous residence state. By doing so, the CPU 103 determines that the number of executions of the jackpot game executed after setting the value of the ball output state flag to "1" has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) which is the end number of times. Based on this, the value of the ball output state flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

In the characteristic portion 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" under the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times. Change the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state to the low ball payout state on the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state. Although the form of control has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-4, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to "1" and then When the total number of game balls entered into each prize winning hole or into the out hole reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls) during the period, the value of the output ball status flag is set to "0". That is, the ``end condition'' in the present invention is ``that the number of game balls used in the game during the period of the continuous game state after setting the value of the ball output state flag to ``1'' reaches a predetermined number. ” may be used. By doing so, the CPU 103 can output the game balls based on the fact that the number of game balls used in the game after setting the value of the output ball status flag to "1" has reached a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls). The value of the ball state flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

Further, in the characterizing portion 162SG, when the value of the payout state flag is "1" (first high payout state) or "2" (second high payout state), special figure variable display in each variation pattern Although an example has been exemplified in which adjustment is executed to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high-ball-out state by prolonging the time, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the ball-out state flag Adjustment may be made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state by making the determination ratio of each variation pattern different.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 12-30 and 12-31 as a modified example 162SG-5, a variation pattern for losing when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (low ball output state) Judgment table A, variation pattern judgment table B for loss for when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" (first ball output state), ball output state flag value is "2" (second ball output state) ) are provided respectively.

As shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A, 1 to 600 out of the possible range 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are non-reach variation patterns PA1 -1, 601 to 900 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 12-30 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, 1 to 400 out of the possible range 1 to 997 of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are non-reach variation patterns PA1 -1, 401 to 800 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 12-30 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, 1 to 200 out of the possible range 1 to 997 of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are non-reach variation patterns PA1 -1, 201 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

Here, when comparing the variation pattern determination table for loss A and the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the rate of non-reach variation patterns determined in the variation pattern determination table for loss B is higher than that in the variation pattern determination table for loss A While is low, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach is set high. In other words, the deviation variation pattern determination table B is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern having a longer variable display time is more likely to be determined than the deviation variation pattern determination table A.

In addition, when comparing the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss and the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss has a higher rate of non-reach fluctuation patterns than the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss. While it is low, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach is determined is set high. In other words, the deviation variation pattern determination table C is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern with a longer variable display time is more likely to be determined than the deviation variation pattern determination table B. FIG.

That is, among these variation pattern determination table A, variation pattern determination table B, and variation pattern determination table C, variation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time, and variation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time. A has the shortest average variable display time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-31, when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" and the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is selected to determine the variation pattern. If the value of the ball output status flag is "1" and the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern determination table B for winning is selected to determine the variation pattern, and the ball output status flag is set. If the value is "2" and the variable display result is a failure, then the variation pattern determination table B for failure should be selected to determine the variation pattern. In this way, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the value of the ball output state flag, it is possible to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG, the "advantageous state" in the present invention is defined as the jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state is controlled a specific number of times (five times in the characteristic portion 162SG) during the period of the continuous game state. Although the example of setting the value of the ball output state flag from "0" to "1" has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "advantageous state" in the present invention includes a small winning game state. It's okay. In particular, a game having a game property in which the present invention can be frequently controlled to a small winning game state during the continuous game state and prize balls are paid out by winning the game balls into the big winning opening in the small winning game state. When applied to a machine (so-called small-hit rush machine), the total number of times controlled to the big-hit game state and the number of times controlled to the small-hit game state during the period of the continuous state is a specific number (for example, 100 By setting the value of the ball payout state flag from '0' to '1' based on the number of times) being reached, it is possible to realize adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball payout state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 162SG, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state of the non-probability variable jackpot, the time-saving control is exemplified by 100 times of variable display after the jackpot game, but the present invention is this. However, a non-probability variable jackpot may be provided in which the number of times of time saving control executed after the jackpot game is completed is less than 100 times (for example, 50 times or 30 times). It should be noted that, in this way, when the time-saving control number of times is provided with a non-probable variable jackpot such as 50 times or 30 times, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2" (high ball output state) After the execution of the non-probability variable jackpot game, when the variable display of the number of times of time reduction control according to the non-probability variable jackpot is executed, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1", and then the variable display is executed 100 times. The value of the ball-out status flag may be set to "0" even if it is not. In other words, if the non-probable variable jackpot is won in the continuous state, and the normal state is reached without winning the jackpot in the time-saving state after the jackpot game of the non-probable variable jackpot is completed, the normal state is reached. Based on this, the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball state may also be terminated.

Further, in this specification, both the pachinko game machine to which the invention of the characteristic part 109SG is applied and the pachinko game machine to which the invention of the characteristic part 162SG is applied are disclosed, but the present invention is not limited to this, Both the invention of the characteristic part 109 and the invention of the characteristic part 162SG may be applied to one pachinko game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Frame for game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decoration symbol display area 6A Winning ball device , 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12 performance control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay Substrate, 21 gate switch, 22A first start switch, 22B second start switch, 23 count switch, 25A first hold indicator, 25B second hold display, 25C normal figure hold display, 30 batting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 81, 82 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 Random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display controller.

Claims (1)

Control is possible to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result, and control is possible to a normal state and a special state that is easier to control to the advantageous state than the normal state. A game machine that
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. Guidance display means for performing
Guiding means for emitting guide light to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light-emitting portion of the light-emitting means;
A predetermined number of times the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period in which the normal state has not been controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state since the normal state was changed to the advantageous state or the special state. updating means capable of updating the numerical data from the first value to the second value,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
Performing the first guidance display in the first display area,
performing the second guidance display in a second display area different from the first display area and smaller than the first display area;
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the second guidance display is performed in a first period of a predetermined period during which a start effect for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed,
performing the first guide display and the second guide display in a second period during the predetermined period and later than the first period ;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
Continuing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed,
The guiding means are
In the first period, the light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the guide light emission,
extinguishing the light emitting means before the second period starts;
Performing the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide display when the second period is started ;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images